2009 Pontiac Solstice Owner Manual M · Front Seats Manual Seats {CAUTION:You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving

Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1-1Front Seats ............................................... 1-2Safety Belts .............................................. 1-6Child Restraints ....................................... 1-22Airbag System ......................................... 1-36Restraint System Check ............................ 1-48

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-2Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-6Windows ................................................. 2-10Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-12Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-16Mirrors .................................................... 2-29OnStar® System ...................................... 2-30Storage Areas ......................................... 2-33Roof Panel .............................................. 2-33Convertible Top ....................................... 2-37

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4Climate Controls ...................................... 3-16Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-19Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-34Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-46

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ....... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-25

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-5Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10Rear Axle ............................................... 5-40Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-41Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-42Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-46Tires ...................................................... 5-47Appearance Care ..................................... 5-90Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-98Electrical System ...................................... 5-98Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-104

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-13Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-15

Index ................................................................ 1

2009 Pontiac Solstice Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC,the PONTIAC Emblem, and the name SOLSTICEare registered trademarks of General MotorsCorporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time itwas printed. GM reserves the right to make changesafter that time without further notice. For vehiclesfirst sold in Canada, substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for Pontiac Division whereverit appears in this manual.

This manual describes features that may or may not beon your specific vehicle.

Read this manual from beginning to end to learn aboutthe vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,and words work together to explain vehicle operation.

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123helminc.com

Propriétaires CanadiensOn peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en françaisauprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:

Helm IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123helminc.com

IndexTo quickly locate information about the vehicle use theIndex in the back of the manual. It is an alphabeticallist of what is in the manual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15899510 A First Printing ©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

ii

Safety Warnings and Symbols

A circle with a slashthrough it is a safetysymbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell aboutthings that could hurt you or others if you were to ignorethe warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoidor reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.

A notice tells about something that can damage thevehicle.

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

Many times, this damage would not be covered by thevehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The noticetells what to do to help avoid the damage.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle which usethe same words, CAUTION or Notice.

iii

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown when you need to see yourowner manual for additional instructions or information.

* : This symbol is shown when you need to see aservice manual for additional instructions or information.

Vehicle Symbol ChartHere are some additional symbols that may be found onthe vehicle and what they mean. For more informationon the symbol, refer to the index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gage

+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

iv

Front Seats ......................................................1-2Manual Seats ................................................1-2Seat Height Adjuster .......................................1-2Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-3Seatback Latches ...........................................1-5

Safety Belts .....................................................1-6Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-6How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-11Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-18Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-21Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-21

Child Restraints .............................................1-22Older Children ..............................................1-22Infants and Young Children ............................1-25Child Restraint Systems .................................1-29Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) ......................................1-31Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front

Seat Position ............................................1-32

Airbag System ...............................................1-36Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-38When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-39What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-40How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-40What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-40Passenger Sensing System ............................1-42Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-46Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................1-47Restraint System Check ..................................1-48

Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-48Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ...................................................1-49

Section 1 Seats and Restraint System

1-1

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle ismoving. The sudden movement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push a pedal when youdo not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

Lift the lever located underthe front of the seat tounlock it.

Slide the seat to where you want it and release thelever. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure theseat is locked in place.

Seat Height Adjuster

On vehicles with a power driver’s seat height adjusterthe switch is located on the front outboard side ofthe driver’s seat.

Raise or lower the seat by holding the switch upor down.

1-2

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle ismoving. The sudden movement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push a pedal when youdo not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seatback, turn the knob on the outboardside of the seatback until the seatback is in thedesired position.

1-3

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle isin motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckleup, your safety belts cannot do their job when youare reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,you could go into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash thebelt could go up over your abdomen. The beltforces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.This could cause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear your safety beltproperly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

1-4

Seatback Latches

The seats have a latchlocated on the outboardside near the top ofthe seatback that enablesthe front seatback(s) tofold forward.

To fold the seatback forward, lift the latch and push theseatback forward.

{CAUTION:

If either seatback is not locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspush and pull on the seatbacks to be sure theyare locked.

1-5

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis section of the manual describes how to usesafety belts properly. It also describes some things notto do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannotbe worn properly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, theinjuries can be much worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or be ejected from thevehicle. You and your passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In the same crash, youmight not be, if you are buckled up. Always fastenyour safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)are restrained properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to beseriously injured or killed. Do not allow people toride in any area of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat and using asafety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle thesafety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-22for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do havea crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are in between. In many ofthem, people who buckle up can survive and sometimeswalk away. Without safety belts, they could havebeen badly hurt or killed.

1-6

After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, thefacts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat onwheels.

Put someone on it.

1-7

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoes not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something. Ina real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-8

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That is whysafety belts make such good sense.

1-9

Questions and Answers About SafetyBelts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if Iam wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safetybelt or not. But your chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, so you can unbuckleand get out, is much greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so theywork with safety belts — not instead of them.Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupantsstill have to buckle up to get the most protection.That is true not only in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in acrash — even one that is not your fault — you andyour passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a gooddriver does not protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) ofhome. And the greatest number of serious injuriesand deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph(65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

1-10

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis section is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-22 orInfants and Young Children on page 1-25. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.

It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out ofthe vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safetybelt, there is important information you should know. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in

front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and youwould be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.

1-11

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give asmuch protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt istoo loose. In a crash, you would move forward toomuch, which could increase injury. The shoulderbelt should fit snugly against your body.

1-12


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly asmuch protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is tooloose. In a crash, you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on your abdomen. This couldcause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

1-13


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckledin the wrong place like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internal injuries. Alwaysbuckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

1-14


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt goes overan armrest like this. The belt would be much toohigh. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. Thebelt force would then be applied on the abdomen,not on the pelvic bones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goesunder the armrests.

1-15


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury. Also,the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internal organs like yourliver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across the chest.

1-16


A: The belt is behind the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by not wearing thelap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your bodycould move too far forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. You might also slideunder the lap belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest.

1-17


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In acrash, you would not have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, makeit straight so it can work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehicle have alap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explain how to wear alap-shoulder belt properly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you cansit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in theIndex.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

1-18

If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulledout all the way, the child restraint locking featuremay be engaged. If this happens, just let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-21.Position the release button on the buckle so thatthe safety belt could be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safetybelt through the latch plate to fully tighten thelap belt on smaller occupants.

1-19

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. Thebelt should return to its stowed position. Slide thelatch plate up the safety belt webbing when the safetybelt is not in use. The latch plate should rest on thestitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop.

Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out ofthe way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,damage can occur to both the safety belt and thevehicle.

Safety Belt PretensionersThis vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for frontoutboard occupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of thesafety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of a moderate to severefrontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensionersactivate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for the vehicle’s safetybelt system. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 1-49.

1-20

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is morelikely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the safety belt will fasten around you, you shoulduse it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, yourdealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you goin to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the extender will be long enough for you. To helpavoid personal injury, do not let someone else useit, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. Theextender has been designed for adults. Never use it forsecuring child seats. To wear it, attach it to theregular safety belt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes with the extender.

1-21

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

The manufacturer’s instructions that come with thebooster seat, state the weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulderbelt until the child passes the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bendat the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder beltrest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, thenreturn to the booster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for thelength of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

1-22

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt andget the additional restraint a shoulder belt canprovide. The shoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below thehips, just touching the top of the thighs. This appliesbelt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. Itshould never be worn over the abdomen, whichcould cause severe or even fatal internal injuries ina crash.

According to accident statistics, children and infants aresafer when properly restrained in rear seating positionsthan in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wear the same safetybelt. The safety belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only one person at a time.

1-23

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with theshoulder belt behind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulderbelt properly. In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt. The child couldmove too far forward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The child might also slideunder the lap belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest.

1-24

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and inevery Canadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured or strangled if ashoulder belt is wrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues to tighten. Never leavechildren unattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not for young children andinfants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system norits airbag system is designed for them. Every timeinfants and young children ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided by appropriate childrestraints.

Children who are not restrained properly can strikeother people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

1-25

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a child while riding in avehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is not possible to hold itduring a crash. For example, in a crash at only25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on aperson’s arms. An infant should be secured in anappropriate restraint.

1-26

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Children who are up against, or very close to, anyairbag when it inflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in theright front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraintin a rear seat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facing child restraint in theright front seat, always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

1-27

Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by thevehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.Selection of a particular restraint should takeinto consideration not only the child’s weight, height,and age but also whether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motor vehicle in which it willbe used.

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasing achild restraint, be sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{CAUTION:

To reduce the risk of neck and head injury duringa crash, infants need complete support. This isbecause an infant’s neck is not fully developedand its head weighs so much compared with therest of its body. In a crash, an infant in arear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the back andshoulders. Infants should always be secured inrear-facing child restraints.

1-28

{CAUTION:

A young child’s hip bones are still so small thatthe vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remainlow on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it maysettle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,young children should always be secured inappropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infantseat (A) provides restraintwith the seating surfaceagainst the back ofthe infant.

The harness system holds the infant in place and, in acrash, acts to keep the infant positioned in therestraint.

A forward-facing childseat (B) provides restraintfor the child’s bodywith the harness.

1-29

A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a child to see out thewindow.

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crashif the child restraint is not properly secured in thevehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in thevehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt, followingthe instructions that came with that child restraintand the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraintmust be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systemsmust be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or thelap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt. A child canbe endangered in a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to theinstructions that come with the restraint which may be onthe restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to thismanual. The child restraint instructions are important, soif they are not available, obtain a replacement copyfrom the manufacturer.

1-30

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle — even when no childis in it.

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraint

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crashif the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the child properly following theinstructions that came with that child restraint.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)Some child restraints have a LATCH system. As part ofthe LATCH system, your child restraint may havelower attachments and/or a top tether. The LATCHsystem can help hold the child restraint in place duringdriving or in a crash. Some vehicles have lowerand/or top tether anchors designed to secure a childrestraint with lower attachments and/or a top tether.

Some child restraints with a top tether are designed tobe used whether the top tether is anchored or not.Other child restraints require that the top tetherbe anchored. A national or local law may require thatthe top tether be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached.

Your vehicle does not have lower anchors or top tetheranchors to secure a child restraint with the LATCHsystem. If a national or local law requires that your toptether be anchored, do not use a child restraint inthis vehicle because a top tether cannot be properlyanchored. You must use the safety belts to secure yourchild restraint in this vehicle, unless a national orlocal law requires that the top tether be anchored.

1-31

Refer to your child restraint instructions and instructionsin this manual for securing a child restraint using thevehicle’s safety belts.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionThis vehicle has airbags. In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which is designed toturn off the right front passenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 1-42 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 3-24 for more information on this, includingimportant safety information.

A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates and the passengerseat is in a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,even if the airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint ina rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-42 foradditional information.

1-32

Rear-facing child restraints should not be installed in thevehicle, even if the airbag is off.

If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 1-31 for how to install your child restraint usingLATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety beltand it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-31 for toptether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in a position without a toptether anchor if a national or local law requires that thetop tether be anchored, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the forward-facing child restraint.When the passenger sensing system has turned offthe right front passenger frontal airbag, the offindicator should light and stay lit when you start thevehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 3-24.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

1-33

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Position the release button on the buckle so thesafety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-34

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. When installing aforward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down on the child restraint asyou tighten the belt.

7. If the child restraint has a top tether anchor, followthe child restraint manufacturer’s instructionsregarding the use of the top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-31 for more information.

8. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passengerairbag status indicator will come on and stay on whenthe vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger Sensing System onpage 1-42 for more information.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehiclesafety belt and let it return to the stowed position.

1-35

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on themiddle part of the steering wheel for the driver andon the instrument panel for the right front passenger.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reduce the risk of injuryfrom the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know about theairbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash ifyou are not wearing your safety belt — even if youhave airbags. Airbags are designed to work withsafety belts, but do not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.In some crashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? onpage 1-39.

Wearing your safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting things inside thevehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

1-36

{CAUTION:

Airbags inflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you would be if you weresitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you in position before andduring a crash. Always wear your safety belt, evenwith airbags. The driver should sit as far back aspossible while still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to, anyairbag when it inflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system is designedfor them. Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system can provide.Always secure children properly in your vehicle. Toread how, see Older Children on page 1-22 orInfants and Young Children on page 1-25.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows the airbagsymbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-23for more information.

1-37

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrumentpanel on the passenger’s side.

1-38

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anairbag, the bag might not inflate properly or itmight force the object into that person causingsevere injury or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not putanything between an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on the steeringwheel hub or on or near any other airbagcovering.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce thepotential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s orright front passenger’s head and chest. However, theyare only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict how severe a crash islikely to be in time for the airbags to inflate andhelp restrain the occupants.

Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is notbased on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It dependslargely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,and how quickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbagscould inflate at a different crash speed than if thevehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speed thanif the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.

In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according tocrash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a more severefrontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stageairbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

1-39

Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether anairbag should have inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costswere. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined bywhat the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In a deployment event, the sensing system sends anelectrical signal triggering a release of gas fromthe inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causingthe bag to break out of the cover and deploy. Theinflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steeringwheel and instrument panel.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel orthe instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact the insideof the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection provided by safetybelts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,stopping the occupant more gradually.

But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,primarily because the occupant’s motion is nottoward those airbags. See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 1-39 for more information.

Airbags should never be regarded as anything morethan a supplement to safety belts.

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may not even realize theairbags inflated. Some components of the airbag modulemay be hot for several minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? onpage 1-40.

The parts of the airbag that come into contact with youmay be warm, but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust coming from the vents in thedeflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not preventthe driver from seeing out of the windshield or beingable to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people fromleaving the vehicle.

1-40

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problems forpeople with a history of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicleshould get out as soon as it is safe to do so. Ifyou have breathing problems but cannot get out ofthe vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get freshair by opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems following an airbagdeployment, you should seek medical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn onthe hazard warning flashers when the airbags inflate.You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, andturn the hazard warning flashers off by using thecontrols for those features.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur from theright front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After anairbag inflates, you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbagsystem will not be there to help protect you inanother crash. A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnosticmodule which records information after a crash.See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy onpage 7-15 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-15.

• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbagsystem. Improper service can mean that theairbag system will not work properly. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

1-41

Passenger Sensing SystemThe vehicle has a passenger sensing system for theright front passenger position. The passenger airbagstatus indicator will be visible on the instrumentpanel when the vehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,will be visible during the system check. If you areusing remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, ifequipped, you may not see the system check. Whenthe system check is complete, either the word ONor OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-24.

The passenger sensing system will turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.The driver airbag is not affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with sensors thatare part of the right front passenger seat. The sensorsare designed to detect the presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the right front passengerfrontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics, children are safer whenproperly secured in a rear seat in the correct childrestraint for their weight and size. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints not be transported in thevehicle, even if the airbag is off.

A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

United States Canada

1-42

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This is because theback of the rear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,even if the airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn offthe right front passenger airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant is present ina rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child is presentin a child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child is presentin a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off ofthe seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied by asmaller person, such as a child who has outgrownchild restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turned off theright front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicatorwill light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-24.

1-43

The passenger sensing system is designed to enable(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the right front passenger seat.When the passenger sensing system has allowed theairbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and staylit to remind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown child restraintsand for very small adults, the passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seatingposture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag for thatperson.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on andstays on, it means that something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To help avoid injury toyourself or others, have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-23for more information, including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraintIf a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.

3. Remove any additional items from the seat such asblankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, orseat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directionsprovided by the child restraint manufacturer andrefer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right FrontSeat Position on page 1-32.

5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn thevehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatbackand adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, tomake sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushingthe child restraint into the seat cushion.

6. Restart the vehicle.If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a childrestraint in this vehicle and check with yourdealer/retailer.

1-44

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sitting properly in the seat. Ifthis happens, use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person and enable the right frontpassenger frontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional material from the seat, suchas blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, orseat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.

4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered onthe seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain inthis position for two to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors Affecting SystemOperationSafety belts help keep the passenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, whichhelps the passenger sensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index for additional informationabout the importance of proper restraint use.

1-45

A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket orcushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affecthow well the passenger sensing system operates.We recommend that you not use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except when approved by GM foryour specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-47 for moreinformation about modifications that can affect how thesystem operates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger seat orbetween the passenger seat cushion and seatbackmay interfere with the proper operation of thepassenger sensing system.

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the airbag system in several placesaround the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and theservice manual have information about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a servicemanual, see Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 7-14.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned offand the battery is disconnected, an airbag can stillinflate during improper service. You can be injuredif you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

1-46

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to or changeabout the vehicle that could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’sframe, bumper system, height, front end or sidesheet metal, they may keep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing or moving any partsof the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, front sensors, or airbag wiring can affectthe operation of the airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem for the right front passenger position, whichincludes sensors that are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seat trim is replacedwith non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trim designed for adifferent vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarketseat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,installed under or on top of the seat fabric,could also interfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. This could either

prevent proper deployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing systemfrom properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-42.

If you have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before you modifyyour vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in Step Two of theCustomer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find out whetherthis will affect my airbag system?

A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual. SeeCustomer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manualhave information about the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbagwiring.

1-47

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint Systems

Safety BeltsNow and then, check the safety belt reminder light,safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.

Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts that might keep a safety belt system from doingits job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Tornor frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is tornor frayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. SeeSafety Belt Reminders on page 3-22 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of SafetyBelts on page 5-93.

AirbagsThe airbag system does not need regularly scheduledmaintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-23 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbag coverings. If there areany opened or broken airbag covers, have theairbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. Forthe location of the airbag modules, see WhatMakes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-40. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

1-48

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systems in yourvehicle. A damaged restraint system may notproperly protect the person using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in a crash. To helpmake sure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspected andany necessary replacements made as soon aspossible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts?

After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.But the belt assemblies that were used during any crashmay have been stressed or damaged. See yourdealer/retailer to have your safety belt assembliesinspected or replaced.

New parts and repairs may be necessary even if thebelt was not being used at the time of the crash.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag system earlierin this section.

Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if yourvehicle has been in a crash, or if your airbag readinesslight stays on after you start your vehicle or whileyou are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 3-23.

1-49

✍ NOTES

1-50

Keys ...............................................................2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ...................................................2-4Doors and Locks .............................................2-6

Manual Door Locks .........................................2-6Power Door Locks ..........................................2-6Delayed Locking .............................................2-7Automatic Door Lock .......................................2-7Automatic Door Unlock ....................................2-7Trunk ............................................................2-8

Windows ........................................................2-10Manual Windows ..........................................2-11Power Windows ............................................2-11Sun Visors ...................................................2-12

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-12Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-12PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer .............2-14PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer

Operation .................................................2-14Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-16

New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-16Ignition Positions ..........................................2-16Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-17

Starting the Engine .......................................2-17Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-19Manual Transmission Operation ......................2-22Parking Brake ..............................................2-23Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) ......2-24Shifting Out of Park ......................................2-25Parking the Vehicle (Manual Transmission) .......2-26Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-26Engine Exhaust ............................................2-27Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-28

Mirrors ...........................................................2-29Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-29Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-29Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-29

OnStar® System .............................................2-30Storage Areas ................................................2-33

Glove Box ...................................................2-33Cupholders ..................................................2-33Center Console Storage .................................2-33

Roof Panel .....................................................2-33Removing the Roof Panel ..............................2-34Installing the Roof Panel ................................2-36

Convertible Top ..............................................2-37

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition keyis dangerous for many reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed. They couldoperate the power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.

Your vehicle has a vehicle theft-deterrent system. Thekey has a transponder in the key head that iselectronically coded to match a decoder in your vehiclethat allows the key to start the vehicle. If a replacementkey or any additional key is needed, you mustpurchase it from your dealer/retailer. SeePASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation onpage 2-14 for additional information.

2-2

The key has a bar-coded key tag that a dealer/retaileror qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 7-6.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on aradio frequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,try this:

• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too farfrom the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy orsnowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section.

• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, seeyour dealer/retailer or a qualified technician forservice.

2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functionswork up to 60 feet (18 m) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-3.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. If enabledthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parkinglamps may flash once and the horn may chirp toindicate locking has occurred. See “LOCK HORN” underDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-41.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.Press K again within five seconds to unlock the otherdoors. The interior lamps come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabledthrough the DIC, the parking lamps flash once toindicate unlocking has occurred. See “UNLOCK HORN”under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-41.

V (Trunk Release): Press and hold forapproximately one second to unlock the trunk. The trunkrelease only works if the ignition is off or the vehiclespeed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h).

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and releaseto locate the vehicle. The horn sounds three timesand the parking lamps flash three times.

Press and hold L for three seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and the parking lamps flashfor 30 seconds. The ignition must be off for the vehiclelocator/remote alarm to work. Press L again orturn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN toturn off the alarm.The vehicle may have Remote Lock/UnlockConfirmation. This feature provides feedback that acommand has been received by the vehicle. The parkinglamps flash and the horn may sound briefly. See“LOCK HORN” and “UNLOCK HORN” under DICVehicle Personalization on page 3-41 for programminginformation.

2-4

Programming Transmitters to theVehicleOnly RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle willwork. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement canbe purchased and programmed through yourdealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, all remaining transmittersmust also be programmed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once the new transmitter isprogrammed. Each vehicle can have up to fourtransmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touchany of the circuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin objectinserted into the notch on the side.

2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter back together.

2-5

Doors and Locks

Manual Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can easily

open the doors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door is locked, the handlewill not open it. You increase the chance ofbeing thrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wear safetybelts properly and lock the doors wheneveryou drive.

• Young children who get into unlocked vehiclesmay be unable to get out. A child can beovercome by extreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or even death from heatstroke. Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking your doors can helpprevent this from happening.

To lock and unlock the vehicle manually:

• From inside the vehicle, pull up or down on themanual door lock knob located on the windowsill.

• From the outside the vehicle, turn the key towardthe front or rear of the vehicle to unlock or lockthe door.

Power Door LocksYou can use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter to lock and unlock the doors from inside oroutside the vehicle. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation on page 2-4 for moreinformation.

In vehicles with power door lock switches, the switchesare located on the doors.

T : Press the top of the switch to lock all doors. Pressthe bottom of the switch to unlock all doors.

2-6

Delayed LockingA vehicle with power door locks has the delayed lockingfeature which delays the actual locking of the doorswhen the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitteris used to lock the vehicle.

If any door is open when locking the vehicle using theRKE transmitter, three chimes will sound signalingthat the delayed locking feature is active. Five secondsafter the last door is closed, both doors will lock andthe parking lamps will flash. To cancel the delayand lock the doors immediately, press the lock buttonon the RKE a second time.

If the key is in the ignition, this feature will not lockthe doors.

Automatic Door LockOn a vehicle with power door locks, the doors willautomatically lock when the shift lever is moved out of(P) Park for a vehicle with an automatic transmission.For a vehicle with a manual transmission, the speedmust be greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

The automatic door locking feature cannot be disabled.

Automatic Door UnlockOn vehicles with an automatic transmission and powerdoor locks, the doors with automatically unlock whenthe shift lever is moved into (P) Park.

On vehicles with a manual transmission and power doorlocks, the doors will automatically unlock when thekey is removed from the ignition.

The automatic unlock feature can be disabled orprogrammed in different ways if the vehicle has anautomatic transmission and a Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 3-41 for more information.

2-7

TrunkTo release the trunk lid use either the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter, or see “Remote TrunkRelease” following.

To close the trunk, push down firmly from the rearcenter of the trunk lid.

{CAUTION:

Exhaust gases may enter the vehicle if it is drivenwith the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with anyobjects that pass through the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

CAUTION: (Continued)


If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, ortrunk/hatch open:

• Close all of the windows• Fully open the air outlets on or under the

instrument panel• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting

that brings in only outside air and set the fanspeed to the highest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,disable the power liftgate function.

For more information about carbon monoxide, seeEngine Exhaust on page 2-27.

2-8

Remote Trunk Release

To open the trunk frominside the vehicle, pressthe remote trunk releasebutton located in theglovebox.

The remote trunk release will only work when either theignition is off or in ACC/ACCESSORY, the parkingbrake is engaged, or the vehicle speed is less than2 mph (3 km/h).

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk releasehandle as a tie-down or anchor point when securingitems in the trunk as it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk release handle is onlyintended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk releasehandle located inside the trunk on the driver’s side. Thishandle will glow following exposure to light. If someoneis locked in the trunk, they can pull the releasehandle and push the trunk lid open from the inside toopen the trunk.

2-9

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in avehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by the extreme heat andsuffer permanent injuries or even death from heatstroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.

2-10

Manual Windows

On vehicles with manualwindows, use the windowcrank to open andclose each window.

Power Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys isdangerous for many reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed. They couldoperate the power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windows will



function and they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closing window.Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in the rear seat use thewindow lockout button to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

On vehicles with power windows, the switches on thedriver’s door armrest control both windows.

2-11

The passenger’s door has a window switch that controlsthat window. Press the front of the switch to open thewindow. Pull the switch up to close it.

Express-Down WindowWindows with an express-down feature allow thewindow to be lowered fully without pressing and holdingthe switch. Press the front of the switch to the firstposition, and the window opens a small amount. Pressthe switch down fully and the window goes all theway down.

To stop the window while it is lowering, pull up the frontof the switch.

Sun VisorsTo use the sun visor(s), pull the edge of the visornearest to the windshield toward you.

Visor Vanity MirrorYour vehicle may have a driver’s side vanity mirror.Swing down the sun visor and slide the cover to exposethe mirror.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,they do not make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarmsystem.

The security light, locatedon the instrument panelcluster, will turn on toindicate that arming hasbeen initiated.

Once the system is armed, the security light will flashonce every three seconds.

If the security light is flashing twice per second, thismeans that a door is open.

2-12

Arming the SystemWhile the ignition is off, press the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter lock button, to arm the system.

The system will arm after either of these things occur:

• Thirty seconds after all the doors are closed.

• Sixty seconds with any door open.

If you press the lock button on the transmitter a secondtime while all the doors are closed, the system willarm immediately. The system arms in 60 seconds if adoor is open, or after the open door is closed.If you do not want to arm the system, lock the car withthe manual door lock knobs.

Disarming the SystemTo disarm the system:

• Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.

• Turn the ignition on.

If the system is armed and the trunk is opened usingthe trunk release button on the transmitter, the systemwill temporarily disarm itself and re-arm when thetrunk has been closed. This allows you to exit thevehicle, lock the doors using the transmitter, or open thetrunk using the transmitter without having to disarmand re-arm the system.Once the system is disarmed, the security light will stopflashing.

How the System Alarm is ActivatedTo activate the system if it is armed:

• Open the driver’s door or trunk. This causes a tensecond pre-alarm chirping noise followed by thehorn sounding and lights flashing for 30 seconds.

• Open a passenger’s door. This immediately causesa full alarm of the horn sounding and lights flashingfor 30 seconds.

After the 30 second alarm ends, the system willre-arm itself.

How to Turn Off the System AlarmTo turn off the system alarm, do one of the following:

• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.The system will then re-arm itself.

• Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.This will also disarm the system.

• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This willalso disarm the system.

How to Detect a Tamper ConditionIf you hear three chirps when you press the unlock, lock,or trunk release buttons on the RKE transmitter, itmeans that the content theft security system alarm wasactivated previously.

2-13

PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizerThe PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.


1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.





PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder inthe key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armed when the keyis removed from the ignition.

You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.

The security light will come on if there is a problemwith arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someoneis using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle fromstarting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to startthe vehicle will be discouraged because of the highnumber of electrical key codes.

When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does notstart and the security light comes on, there may bea problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turnthe ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the key appears tobe undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,you may also want to check the fuse, see Fusesand Circuit Breakers on page 5-99. If the engine stilldoes not start with the other key, your vehicle needsservice. If your vehicle does start, the first key may befaulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the

2-14

PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In anemergency, contact Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-6, for more information.

It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoderto “learn” the transponder value of a new or replacementkey. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for thevehicle. The following procedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all the currently programmedkeys are lost or do not operate, you must see yourdealer/retailer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have keys made and programmed tothe system.

See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cutexactly as the ignition key that operates the system.

To program the new key:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignitionand start the engine. If the engine will not start,see your dealer/retailer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toLOCK/OFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to theON/RUN position within five seconds of the originalkey being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.The security light will turn off once the key hasbeen programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are tobe programmed.

If you are ever driving and the security light comes onand stays on, you may be able to restart your engine ifyou turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,is not working properly and must be serviced byyour dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by thePASS-Key® III+ system at this time.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, seeyour dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or device that disarms ordeactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.

2-15

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak-in. But it will perform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines for the first 500 miles(805 km):

• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fastor slow.

• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).

• Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrainfrom using the full throttle while driving.Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.

If these break-in procedures are not followed,the vehicle’s engine, axle, or other parts could bedamaged.

Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time the new brakelinings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with newlinings can mean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brake linings.

Following break-in, engine speed and load can begradually increased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch hasfour different positions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal must beapplied.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in theignition could cause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correct key, make sure it isall the way in, and turn it only with your hand. If thekey cannot be turned by hand, see yourdealer/retailer.

9 (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition andsteering column. The key can only be removed inLOCK/OFF.

2-16

If you have an automatic transmission, the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to LOCK/OFF unless the shiftlever is in P (Park).

If you have a manual transmission, the ignition switchcan be turned to LOCK/OFF in any shift lever position.

{CAUTION:

If you have a manual transmission removing thekey from the ignition switch will lock the steeringcolumn and result in a loss of ability to steer thevehicle. This could cause a collision. If you needto turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving,turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the position in whichyou can operate some of the electrical accessories. Itunlocks the steering wheel and ignition.

R (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate theelectrical accessories and to display some instrumentpanel cluster warning and indicator lights. Theswitch stays in this position when the engine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able to start the vehicleif the battery is allowed to drain for an extended periodof time.

/ (START): This is the position that starts the engine.When the engine starts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN for normal driving.

A warning tone will sound when the driver door isopened, the ignition is in LOCK/OFF orACC/ACCESSORY and the key is in the ignition.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)These vehicle accessories can be used for up to10 minutes after the engine is turned off:

• Audio System

• Power Windows, if equipped

• Sunroof, if equipped

The power windows and sunroof will continue to workfor up to 10 minutes or until any door is opened.The radio will work when the key is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned fromON/RUN to OFF/LOCK, the radio will continue to workfor 10 minutes or until the driver’s door is opened.

2-17

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in the proper gear.

Automatic TransmissionMove the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). Theengine will not start in any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicleis moving. If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicleis stopped.

Manual TransmissionThe shift lever should be in N (Neutral) and the parkingbrake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to thefloor and start the engine. The vehicle will not start if theclutch pedal is not all the way down.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the

ignition key to START. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as theengine warms. Do not race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists in starting theengine and protects components. If the ignition keyis turned to the START position, and thenreleased when the engine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking for a few seconds oruntil the vehicle starts. If the engine does notstart and the key is held in START for manyseconds, cranking will be stopped after 15 secondsto prevent cranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running. Engine crankingcan be stopped by turning the ignition switchto ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods oftime, by returning the key to the START positionimmediately after cranking has ended, can overheatand damage the cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,to let the cranking motor cool down.

2-18

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Push the accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it there as you hold the keyin START for a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stops again, repeat theprocedure. This clears the extra gasoline from theengine. Do not race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed to work with theelectronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, theengine might not perform properly. Any resultingdamage would not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Automatic Transmission OperationIf the vehicle has an automatic transmission, theshift lever is located on the center console between thefront seats.

There are several differentpositions for the automatictransmission.

2-19

P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is thebest position to use when starting the engine becausethe vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. To besure the vehicle will not move, even when you areon fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) beforestarting the engine. The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock control system. You have to fullyapply the regular brakes first and then press the shiftlever button before the vehicle can shift from P (Park)when the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If the vehicle cannotshift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift leverand push the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Then press the shift leverbutton and then move the shift lever into another gear.See Shifting Out of Park on page 2-25.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle ismoving forward could damage the transmission.The repairs would not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.

To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,ice, or sand without damaging the transmission,see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snowon page 4-19.

N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does notconnect with the wheels. To restart the engine when thevehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed is dangerous. Unless yourfoot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle couldmove very rapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift into a drive gearwhile the engine is running at high speed.

2-20

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) withthe engine running at high speed may damagethe transmission. The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine isnot running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is for normal driving with theautomatic transmission. It provides the best fueleconomy. If you need more power for passing andyou are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push theaccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the acceleratorall the way down.

The transmission will shift down to a lower gear andhave more power.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditionscould result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss ofControl on page 4-12.

4 (Fourth): This position is also used for normaldriving. However, it reduces vehicle speed more thanD (Drive) without using the brakes. You might choose4 (Fourth) instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly,winding roads and when going down a steep hill.

I (Intermediate): This position is also used for normaldriving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without usingthe brakes, for slight downgrades where the vehiclewould otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade.If constant upshifting or downshifting occurs whiledriving on steep hills, this position can be used toprevent repetitive types of shifts. You might chooseI (Intermediate) instead of D (Drive) when driving on hillyand winding roads.

L (Low): This position reduces vehicle speed morethan I (Intermediate) without using the brakes. You canuse it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. Ifthe shift lever is put in L (Low), the transmission will notshift into a low gear until the vehicle is going slowlyenough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle inone place on a hill using only the acceleratorpedal may damage the transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehicle warranty. If youare stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on ahill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

2-21

Manual Transmission Operation

This is the shift pattern.

Here is how to operate the manual transmission:

1 (First): Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First).Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you pressthe accelerator pedal.

You can shift into 1 (First) when the vehicle is travelingless than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put theshift lever in N (Neutral) and let up on the clutchpedal. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on theaccelerator pedal and shift into 2 (Second). Then,slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), and 5 (Fifth): Shift into 3 (Third),4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth) the same way you do for2 (Second). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as youpress the accelerator pedal down.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press thebrake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift toN (Neutral).

N (Neutral): Use this position when you start or idle theengine.

R (Reverse): To back up, press the clutch pedal. Afterthe vehicle stops, shift into R (Reverse). Slowly letup on the clutch pedal as you press the acceleratorpedal. If it is hard to shift, let the shift lever returnto N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal. Then pressthe clutch pedal again and shift into R (Reverse). Donot attempt to shift into the fifth gear position priorto shifting into R (Reverse). The transmission has a lockout feature which prevents a fifth gear to reverse gearshift.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle ismoving forward could damage the transmission.The repairs would not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

Also, use 1 (First) or R (Reverse) along with the parkingbrake, for parking the vehicle.

2-22

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is located between thefront seats.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal downand pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition ison, the brake system warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-25.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can pressthe release button. Hold the release button in as youmove the brake lever all the way down.

If you forget to release your parking brake, a chime willsound and a warning message will be displayed inthe Driver Information Center (DIC) when the vehicle ismoving faster than 5 mph (8 kph). See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-37.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Make surethat the parking brake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

2-23

Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. To besure the vehicle will not move, even when you areon fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parkingbrake. See Parking Brake on page 2-23 for moreinformation.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pressing thebutton on the shift lever and pushing the lever allthe way toward the front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave the vehicle with the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle With the EngineRunning (Automatic Transmission)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with theengine running. The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with theparking brake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it could overheatand even catch fire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehicle with the enginerunning.

If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parkingbrake is firmly set before you leave it. After you havemoved the shift lever into P (Park), hold the brake pedaldown. Then see if you can move the shift lever awayfrom P (Park) without first pushing the shift lock releasebutton. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into P (Park).

2-24

Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransmission into P (Park) properly, the weight ofthe vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of P (Park). This is called “torque lock.” Toprevent torque lock, set the parking brake and thenshift into P (Park) properly before you leave the driverseat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 2-24.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out ofP (Park) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have anothervehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of thepressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, soyou can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).

Shifting Out of ParkThe vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lockrelease system. The shift lock release is designed to:

• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shiftlever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fullyreleased, and

• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park),unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is always functional except inthe case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery withlow voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.See Jump Starting on page 5-36 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.

If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift lever button.

2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shiftlever button again.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.

If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park), seeyour dealer/retailer.

2-25

Parking the Vehicle (ManualTransmission)Before leaving the manual transmission vehicle, fullypress the clutch pedal in, move the shift lever in either1 (First) gear or R (Reverse), and firmly apply theparking brake. See Manual Transmission Operation onpage 2-22.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things thatcan burn.

2-26

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness and even death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation

(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow thatmay block underbody airflow or tail pipes).

• The exhaust smells or sounds strange ordifferent.

• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion ordamage.

• The vehicle’s exhaust system has beenmodified, damaged or improperly repaired.

• There are holes or openings in the vehiclebody from damage or after-marketmodifications that are not completely sealed.



If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspectedthat exhaust is coming into the vehicle:

• Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.

Never park the vehicle with the engine running inan enclosed area such as a garage or a buildingthat has no fresh air ventilation.

2-27

Running the Vehicle While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But if youever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poorventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousness and even death.Never run the engine in an enclosed area that hasno fresh air ventilation. For more information, seeEngine Exhaust on page 2-27.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if theautomatic transmission shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. Thevehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. To besure the vehicle will not move, even when it is onfairly level ground, always set the parking brakeand move the automatic transmission shift lever toP (Park), or the manual transmission shift lever toNeutral.

Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will notmove. See Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission)on page 2-24 and Parking the Vehicle (ManualTransmission) on page 2-26.

2-28

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorAdjust the mirror to see clearly behind your vehicle. Holdthe mirror in the center to move it up or down and side toside. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlampsbehind your vehicle. Move the lever to the right fornighttime use and to the left for daytime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional controlbuttons located at the bottom of the mirror. Seeyour dealer/retailer for more information on the systemand how to subscribe to OnStar. See OnStar®

System on page 2-30 for more information on theservices OnStar provides.

Outside Manual MirrorsAdjust the outside rearview mirrors to see a little of theside of your vehicle, and the area beside your vehicle.

Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damagewhen going through an automatic car wash. Tofold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirroroutward, to return to its original position.

Outside Power Mirrors

Controls for the outsidepower mirrors are locatedon the driver door.

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press the left or right side of the selector switchlocated next to the control pad to choose thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrows located on the controlpad to move the mirror in the desired direction.

3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of thevehicle and the area behind it can be seen.

Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damagewhen going through an automatic car wash. Tofold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirroroutward, to return to its original position.

2-29

OnStar® System

OnStar uses several innovative technologies and liveadvisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,information, and convenience services. If the airbagsdeploy, the system is designed to make an automaticcall to OnStar Emergency advisors who can requestemergency services be sent to your location. If thekeys are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock thedoors. OnStar Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trialminutes good for 60 days, is available on most vehicles.OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trialroute, is available on most vehicles. Press theOnStar button to have an OnStar advisor contactRoadside Service.

OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Termsand Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriberglove box literature.

Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or StolenVehicle Location Assistance may not be availableuntil the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. Afterthe first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select amonthly or annual subscription payment plan. If apayment plan is not selected, the OnStar system and allservices, including airbag notification and emergencyservices, may be deactivated and no longer available.For more information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca(Canada), or press the OnStar button to speak withan advisor.

Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.To check if this vehicle is able to provide the servicesdescribed below, or for a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’sGuide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) oronstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or pressthe OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

OnStar Services Available with theSafe & Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

2-30

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email

• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes

• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

OnStar Services Included withDirections & Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) orDriving Directions - Advisor delivered

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar Hands-Free CallingOnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStarsubscribers to make and receive calls using voicecommands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated intothe vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-PaidMinute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutesgood for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also belinked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or

a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’sGuide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit onstar.com oronstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar advisor by pressingthe OnStar button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar Turn-by-Turn NavigationVehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigationsystem can provide voice-guided driving directions.Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisorlocate a business or address and download drivingdirections to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to thedesired destination will play through the audio systemspeakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

OnStar Virtual AdvisorOnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStarHands-Free Calling that uses minutes to accesslocation-based weather, local traffic reports, and stockquotes. Press the phone button and give a fewsimple voice commands to browse through the varioustopics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for moreinformation. This feature is only available in thecontinental U.S.

2-31

OnStar Steering Wheel ControlsThis vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can beused to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-79 formore information.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dialnumbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

How OnStar Service WorksThe OnStar system can record and transmit vehicleinformation. This information is automatically sent to anOnStar Call Center when the OnStar button ispressed, the emergency button is pressed, or if theairbags or AACN system deploy. This informationusually includes the vehicle’s GPS location and, in theevent of a crash, additional information regardingthe crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. thedirection from which the vehicle was hit). Whenthe Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Callingis used, the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle’sGPS location so they can provide services where it islocated.

OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in aplace where OnStar has an agreement with a wirelessservice provider for service in that area. OnStarservice also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place

where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired forthat area has coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology that iscompatible with the OnStar service. Not all services areavailable everywhere, particularly in remote orenclosed areas, or at all times.

Location information about the vehicle is only availableif the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed andavailable.

The vehicle must have a working electrical system,including adequate battery power, for the OnStarequipment to operate. There are other problems OnStarcannot control that may prevent OnStar from providingOnStar service at any particular time or place. Someexamples are damage to important parts of the vehiclein a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather orwireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityIncrease the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisorcannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons isred, the system may not be functioning properly.Press the OnStar button and request a vehiclediagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light isappearing), your OnStar subscription has expired andall services have been deactivated. Press the OnStarbutton to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.

2-32

Storage Areas

Glove BoxLift the glove box handle up to open it. Use the key tolock and unlock the glove box.

Cupholders

There is a cupholder on the passenger side of thecenter console. Press and release the forward sectionof the cupholder to access it.

Center Console StorageThere is an upright center console storage area betweenthe seatbacks. Open the storage area by pressingand releasing the button near the top so it extends out.Turn the button in either direction to unlatch the lidand pull the console lid down.

Press the release button back in after closing the lid.

Roof PanelOn vehicles with a removable roof panel, follow theprocedures when removing or installing it.

2-33

Removing the Roof Panel

{CAUTION:

Do not try to remove a roof panel while the vehicleis moving. Trying to remove the roof panel whilethe vehicle is moving could cause an accident.The panel could fall into the vehicle and causeyou to lose control, or it could fly off and strikeanother vehicle. You or others could be injured.Remove the roof panel only when the vehicle isparked.

Until you are sure you can remove the panel alone,have someone help you.

Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on itsedges, the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstrippingmay be damaged.

Park on a level surface and set the parking brake. Shiftan automatic transmission into (P) Park. Shift amanual transmission into (N) Neutral.

1. Make sure the ignition is off.

2. Lower the windows.There are two release latches on the front of theroof panel and one rear release latch on the back ofthe roof panel.

3. To unlock the release latches on the front of theroof panel, grasp each handle and pull it outward.

2-34

The driver’s side handle moves toward the driver’sdoor. The passenger’s side handle moves towardthe passenger’s door.

4. To unlock the rear ofthe roof panel’s rearrelease latch, press theback of the releasehandle (B). Then pressthe button on thefront of the releasehandle (A) withyour thumb.

Pull down the latch lever.

5. Stand on one side of the vehicle, and if necessary,have someone stand on the other side. Together,carefully lift the front edge of the roof panel upand forward.

6. When the roof panel is loosened from the vehicle,one person should grasp the roof panel as close tothe center as possible and lift it away from thevehicle.

Storing the Roof PanelAfter removing the panel place it on a flat surface with asoft protective covering. The panel must be storedwith the interior surface resting flat.

2-35

Installing the Roof Panel

{CAUTION:

An improperly attached roof panel may fall into orfly off the vehicle. You or others could be injured.After installing the roof panel, always check that itis firmly attached by pushing up on the undersideof the panel. Check now and then to be sure theroof panel is firmly in place.

Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on itsedges, the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstrippingmay be damaged. Always place the roof panel inthe stowage receivers after removing it fromthe vehicle.

In most cases, it makes it easier if two people re-installthe roof panel.

1. Park on a level surface and set the parking brake.Shift an automatic transmission into (P) Park. Shifta manual transmission into (N) Neutral.

2. Check that the front release latches and the rearrelease latch on the vehicle’s roof opening are intheir opened positions before attempting toinstall the roof panel.

3. Carefully place the roof panel over the top of thevehicle.

4. Position the rear edge of the roof panel on the backof the roof opening. Then align and fit the pins atthe rear of the roof panel. Gently lower thefront edge of the roof panel to the front of the roofopening.

5. Turn the front releasehandles inward so thatthey latch to theclosed position.

6. Push up on the handle of the rear roof releasehandle to latch its hook in the closed position.

7. Push and pull the roof panel up and down andside-to-side to ensure the roof panel is securelyinstalled.

2-36

Convertible TopFor care and cleaning of the convertible top, seeConvertible Top on page 5-95 under “Service andAppearance Care”. High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.

A clear protective film has been installed on the trunk lidsurface under the convertible top buttresses. This filmis designed to help prevent paint damage to the trunk lid.Do not remove this protective film.

The following procedures explain the proper operationof the manual convertible top.

The parts of the manual convertible top that are usedwhen lowering and raising it are:

A. Front EdgeB. Side EdgeC. Lower Seal Pins

D. Rear ButtressesE. Trunk

Notice: Leaving the convertible top down andexposing the interior of your vehicle to outdoorconditions may cause damage. Always closethe convertible top if leaving your vehicle outdoors.

Notice: Lowering the convertible top when thereare objects in the storage area could damageit or break the glass rear window. Always verify thatno objects are in the storage area before loweringthe convertible top.

2-37

Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or dirtycan cause stains, mildew, and damage to theinside of your vehicle. Dry off the top beforelowering it.

Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle in coldweather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you may damagetop components. Do not lower the top in coldweather.

Notice: If you raise or lower the convertible topwhile the vehicle is in motion, you could damage thetop or the top mechanism. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always put anautomatic transmission in (P) Park or a manualtransmission in (1) First or (R) Reverse, turnthe ignition off and engage the parking brake beforeraising or lowering the convertible top.

{CAUTION:

Moving parts of the convertible top can bedangerous. People can be injured by theconvertible top and its mechanism. Keep peopleaway from your vehicle when you are lowering orraising the top.

Lowering the Manual Convertible Top1. Empty the trunk of all contents.

2. Park on a level surface and set the parking brake.Shift an automatic transmission into (P) Park. Shifta manual transmission into (1) First or (R) Reverse.

3. Turn the ignition off.

4. Open the trunk.

5. Pull down on the convertible top front latch, locatedabove the inside rearview mirror, and turn itcounterclockwise to unlatch it.Leave the latch open and turned to prevent damage.

2-38

6. Pull rearward on the side edge (B) of the convertibletop and pull it off of the windshield frame.

7. Push the convertible top down into the trunk (E).

8. After the top is stored, as shown, push on theconvertible top to ensure that the top is fullyretracted and securely stored.

9. Close the trunk (E) by pressing down from the rearcenter of it with a swift, firm motion.

Do not operate the rear defogger when the convertibletop is down.

Raising the Manual Convertible Top1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake firmly

and shift an automatic transmission into (P) Park.Shift a manual transmission into (1) First or(R) Reverse.

2. Turn off the ignition, and lower the windows.

3. Push the trunk release button located in the glovebox, or on the remote keyless entry, if equipped.

4. Open the trunk.

5. Pull the convertible top forward by firmly gripping theside edge (B) and applying a brisk upward andforward motion to get the top in the full-up position.

2-39

6. Pull the front edge (A) of the convertible top forwardfrom the outside of the vehicle, or push the frontedge (A) of the convertible top forward fromthe inside of the vehicle.

7. Turn the top front latch handle clockwise to latchthe convertible top.

8. Make sure the lower seal pins (C) are correctlyaligned and inserted.

9. Close the trunk by pressing down on the rearcenter with a swift, firm motion.

10. At the rear edge of the convertible top, press downon the two buttresses (D) to latch them into the topof the trunk.

2-40

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-5Horn .............................................................3-5Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-6Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-7Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-7Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-8Windshield Washer .........................................3-9Cruise Control ................................................3-9Headlamps ..................................................3-12Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-13Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-13Fog Lamps ..................................................3-13Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-14Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-14Mirror Reading Lamps ...................................3-14Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-14Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-14Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-15

Climate Controls ............................................3-16Climate Control System .................................3-16Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-19

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-19Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-20Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-21Tachometer .................................................3-21Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-22Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-23Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-24Charging System Light ..................................3-25Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-25Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .....3-26Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction

Control System (TCS) Indicator/WarningLight ........................................................3-27

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-28Low Coolant Warning Light ............................3-28Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-29Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-29Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-32Security Light ...............................................3-32Highbeam On Light .......................................3-33Trunk Ajar Light ............................................3-33Fuel Gage ...................................................3-33Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-34

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-34DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-35DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-37DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-41

Audio System(s) .............................................3-46Setting the Clock ..........................................3-47Radio(s) ......................................................3-49Using an MP3 ..............................................3-60

XM Radio Messages .....................................3-67Bluetooth® ...................................................3-68Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-78Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-79Radio Reception ...........................................3-80Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-81XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-81Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-81

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-2

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

3-4

The main components of the instrument panel are thefollowing:A. Side Window Outlets. See Climate Control System

on page 3-16.B. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-19.C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-6.D. Cruise Control on page 3-9 (If Equipped).E. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-20.F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-79

(If Equipped).G. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-14.H. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-24.I. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-5.J. Fog Lamps on page 3-13 (If Equipped).K. Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control

System (TCS) Button (If Equipped). See ElectronicStability Control (ESC) on page 4-6 or TractionControl System (TCS) on page 4-8.

L. Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-34.M. Horn on page 3-5.N. Windshield Wipers on page 3-8 and Windshield

Washer on page 3-9.O. Climate Control System on page 3-16.

P. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). Ashtray(s) andCigarette Lighter on page 3-15 and Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 3-14 (If Equipped).

Q. Shift Lever. See Manual Transmission Operation onpage 2-22. See Automatic Transmission Operationon page 2-19 (If equipped with automatictransmission).

R. Parking Brake on page 2-23.S. Audio System(s) on page 3-46.T. Cupholders on page 2-33.U. Trunk Release. See Trunk on page 2-8.V. Glove Box on page 2-33.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this buttonlocated on the instrument panel, to make the front andrear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warnsothers that you are having trouble.

Press | again to turn the flashers off.

HornTo sound the horn, press the center pad on the steeringwheel.

3-5

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel lets the steering wheel be adjusted.

The tilt lever is located on the left side of the steeringcolumn.

To tilt the wheel, pull the lever down. Raise or lower thewheel to a comfortable position, then pull the lever upto lock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals

53: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

O : Exterior Lamp Control

Flash-to-Pass.

Information for these features is on the pages following.

3-6

Turn and Lane-Change Signals

An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster flashes in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flashto signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lanechange is complete.

The lever returns to its starting position when it isreleased.

If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrowsflash rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb maybe burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 5-99.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam to highbeam, push the turn signal lever away from you.

This indicator light appearson the instrument panelcluster when the highbeams are on.

To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,pull the turn signal lever toward you.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps tosignal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.

To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever towardyou until the high-beam headlamps come on, thenrelease the lever to turn them off.

3-7

Windshield Wipers

The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side ofthe steering wheel.

Move the lever to control the windshield wipers.

9 (Off): Turns off the windshield wipers.

& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): Forintermittent or speed sensitive operation. The amount ofdelay time varies between wiping cycles due to thedelay setting selected or the speed of the vehicle. Asvehicle speed is increased or decreased, the wiperinterval also increases or decreases.

x (Delay): While the lever is in the intermittentposition, turn the intermittent adjust band with thissymbol on it up or down to select a shorter or longerdelay between wiping cycles. To the left of theadjust band are bars, increasing in size from bottom totop, that indicate the frequency of the wipes. Smallerbars mean the wipers movement is less frequent. Largerbars mean the movement is more frequent.

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.

1 (High Speed): For wiping at a high speed.

8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down for a singlewiping cycle. Hold it there until the windshield wipersstart; then release. The wipers stop after one wipingcycle. Hold the lever down longer, for more wipe cycles.

Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades beforeusing them.

If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefullyloosen or thaw them. If they become damaged, installnew blades.

3-8

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. Acircuit breaker stops the motor until it cools. If the motorgets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away the snowor ice, and then turn the wipers back on.

As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on formore than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps turn onautomatically. They turn off 15 seconds after thewipers are turned off.

Windshield WasherPress the button at the end of the windshield wiperlever until the washers begin.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washer untilthe windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking yourvision.

When the button is released, the washers stop, but thewipers continue to wipe about three times or resumethe previous speed.

Cruise ControlFor vehicles with cruise control, a speed of about25 mph (40 km/h) or more can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control doesnot work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where youcannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do notuse the cruise control on winding roads or inheavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.On such roads, fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.

3-9

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when you arenot using cruise, you might hit a button and gointo cruise when you do not want to. You could bestartled and even lose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you want to use cruisecontrol.

The cruise control buttonsare located on the left sideof the steering wheel.

J (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control system onand off.

RES+ (Resume): Press to resume a set speed and toaccelerate the speed.

SET− (Set): Press to set a speed and to decrease thespeed.

To set a speed do the following:

1. Press I to turn cruise control on. The indicatorlight on the button will come on.

2. Get to the desired speed.

3. Press the SET− control button and release it. TheCRUISE ENGAGED message will appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC) to show the systemis engaged.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

When you apply the brakes or depress the clutch, thecruise control will shut off.

Resuming a Set SpeedIf the cruise control is at a desired speed and then thebrake is applied, this disengages the cruise control.But it does not need to be reset. Once the vehicleis going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, press theRES+ button briefly.

This takes you back up to the previously chosen speedand stays there.

3-10

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to increase speed.

1. Disengage the cruise control by applying the brakepedal but do not turn it off. Accelerate to a higherspeed and reset the cruise control.

2. If the cruise control system is already engaged,press the RES+ button. Press it until the desiredspeed is reached, and then release the button.To increase the vehicle speed in small amounts,press the RES+ button briefly and then releaseit. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlIf the cruise control system is already engaged,

• Push and hold the SET− part of the button until thelower speed desired is reached, then release it.

• To slow down in small amounts, push the SET−part of the button briefly. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’sspeed. When you take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to the cruise control speedset earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control works on hills depends uponthe vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of thehills. When going up steep hills, you might have to stepon the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehiclespeed. When going downhill, you might have to brakeor shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down.When the brakes are applied the cruise control willturn off.

Ending Cruise ControlTo end cruise control, step lightly on the brakepedal or the clutch pedal if the vehicle has a manualtransmission.

Stepping on the brake pedal or clutch pedal will onlyend the current cruise control session.

Press I to turn the system completely off.

3-11

Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speed memory is erased whenthe cruise control or the ignition is turned off.

Headlamps

The lever on the left side of the steering columnoperates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp switch has the following four positions:

2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, parkinglamps, and taillamps.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps andtaillamps only.

AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Automaticallyturns on the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) duringdaytime, and the headlamps, parking lamps, andtaillamps at night.

P (Off/On): Turns the Automatic Headlamp Systemon or off. In Canada, this applies to vehicles withan automatic transmission set to P (Park) and manualtransmission vehicles with the parking brake engaged.

When operating in AUTO, a brief turn of the switchto off/on will turn off the Automatic Headlamp System.An AUTO LIGHTS OFF message displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) and a chime will sound.Turning the switch to off/on again will turn the AutomaticHeadlamp System back on. An AUTO LIGHTS ONmessage will display on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

The Automatic Headlamp System is always turned on atthe beginning of an ignition cycle for vehicles withmanual transmission. When the parking brake isengaged, the automatic headlamps will turn off.

For vehicles with an automatic transmission, when theshift lever is shifted out of P (Park), the AutomaticHeadlamp System turns on. Shifting the lever back toP (Park) will turn off the automatic headlamp system.

3-12

Headlamps on ReminderIf the drivers door is opened with the ignition off and thelamps on, a warning chime will sound. This indicatesthat the headlamps are still on.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during theday. Fully functional daytime running lamps are requiredon all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrumentpanel that helps control the DRL. Do not cover thissensor or the headlamps will come on when they arenot needed.

The DRL system makes both low beam headlamps turnon at reduced intensity when the following conditionsare met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO.

• The light sensor detects daytime light.

• The shift lever is not in P (Park).

While the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarkerlamps, and instrument panel lights will not be on.

The DRL system turns off on U.S. vehicles by using theon/off switch for one ignition cycle, if the vehicle is inthe P (Park) position, or if the vehicle speed is less than5 mph (8 km/h) after the vehicle is started.

For vehicles first sold in Canada the DRL system willturn off when a automatic transmission vehicle is in theP (Park) position or the park brake is set on a manualtransmission vehicle and the vehicle speed is less than8 mph (13 km/h).

The regular headlamp system should be turned onwhen it is needed.

Fog LampsFor vehicles with fog lamps, the button is located on theinstrument panel, to the right of the steering wheel.

The ignition must be on to use the fog lamps.

# : Press to turn the fog lamps on and off. An indicatorlight on the button comes on when the fog lampsare on.

The parking lamps automatically turn on and off whenthe fog lamps are turned on and off.

The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beamheadlamps are turned on.

Some localities have laws that require the headlamps tobe on along with the fog lamps.

3-13

Instrument Panel BrightnessThe control for this feature is located on the instrumentpanel to the right of the steering wheel.

D Instrument Panel Brightness: Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dimthe lights.

Entry/Exit LightingThe lamps inside the vehicle come on when any door isopened. These lamps will fade out after about20 seconds after all of the doors have been closed orwhen the ignition is turned on. These lamps will also goon when you press the trunk release, unlock symbolbutton or the horn symbol on the Remote Keyless EntrySystem (RKE) Transmitter.

The lamps inside the vehicle will stay on for about20 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition toprovide an illuminated exit.

Mirror Reading LampsThe vehicle has reading lamps on the rearview mirror.Push the button to turn the reading lamps on and off.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThe vehicle has a battery saver feature designed toprotect the vehicle’s battery.

When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition isturned off, the battery rundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off after 20 minutes. Thisprevents draining of the battery.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)The accessory power outlet can be used to connectelectrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.

The accessory power outlet is located on the instrumentpanel, below the radio.

To use the outlet, remove the cover. When not in use,always cover the outlet with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in foran extended period of time while the vehicle is offwill drain the battery. Power is always suppliedto the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipmentwhen not in use and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.

3-14

Certain electrical accessories may not be compatiblewith the accessory power outlet and could resultin blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience aproblem, see your dealer/retailer for additionalinformation on the accessory power outlet.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to thevehicle can damage it or keep other componentsfrom working as they should. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not useequipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer beforeadding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow theinstallation instructions included with the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can causedamage not covered by the warranty. Do not hangany type of accessory or accessory bracket from theplug because the power outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterThe vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.To use the lighter, located on the instrument panelbelow the radio, push it in all the way and let go. Whenit is ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it isheating does not let the lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot. Damage fromoverheating can occur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it is heating.

Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable itemsare put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignite them and possiblydamage the vehicle. Never put flammable itemsin the ashtray.

3-15

Climate Controls

Climate Control System

A. TemperatureControl

B. Fan ControlC. Air Delivery Mode

Control

D. Air ConditioningE. RecirculationF. Rear Window

Defogger

The heating and ventilation of the vehicle can becontrolled with this system. For vehicles with airconditioning, you will also be able to control the coolingof the vehicle.

9 (Off): Turn the fan control to this position to turnthe fan off.

Temperature Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thetemperature.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the fan speed.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to change the direction of the airflowinside the vehicle.

Select from the following modes:

H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument paneloutlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the instrument panel,floor, defroster and side window outlets. Cooler airis directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to thefloor outlets.

Climate Control System with Air Conditioningshown, Climate Control System without Air

Conditioning similar

3-16

[ (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, withsome directed to the side window and defroster outlets.If low or no airflow is on the passenger side, makesure that the carpet covering is tucked under flooroutlets.

/ (Floor/Defog): This mode clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield,side window, and floor outlets. In this mode, the systemruns the air conditioning compressor unless theoutside temperature is near freezing or below.

0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from thewindshield more quickly. Air is directed to the windshieldand side window outlets. In this mode, the systemruns the air conditioning compressor unless the outsidetemperature is near or below freezing.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

To prevent fogging on the inside of the windows inmodes other than floor/defog and defrost, make sure theair conditioning compressor is on and recirculationmode is off.

# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the airconditioning system on or off. An indicator light comeson to show that the air conditioning is on. Thissetting cools and dehumidifies the air entering thevehicle.

The air conditioning does not work if the fan is turnedoff. If air conditioning is selected with fan off, theindicator light flashes three times and then turns off.

There could be a slight change in engine performancewhen the air conditioning compressor turns off and turnson again. This is normal. The system is designed tomake adjustments to help with fuel economy while stillmaintaining the selected temperature.

Air conditioning does not operate at temperatures below40°F (4°C). In temperatures above 40°F (4°C), the airconditioning cannot be turned off in defrost, floor/defog,and recirculation modes because it helps to removemoisture from the vehicle. It also helps to keepthe windows clear.

On hot days, open the windows to let the hot inside airescape; then close them. This helps reduce the timeit takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helpsthe system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:

1. Select H .

2. Select ? .

3. Select the air conditioning to on.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

3-17

Using these settings together for long periods of time cancause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry. Toprevent this from happening, after the air in the vehiclehas cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.

The air conditioning system removes moisture from theair, so a small amount of water might drip under thevehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculationmode on or off. An indicator light comes on to show thatrecirculation is on.

This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the airinside the vehicle. It can be used to help preventoutside air and odors from entering the vehicle.

Recirculation is available in the bi-level and vent modes.If recirculation is selected in either floor/heat, floor/defog,or defrost mode, the indicator light flashes three timesindicating it is not available in that mode.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.

= (Rear Defogger): Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator light comes on to showthat the rear window defogger is on. Be sure to clearas much snow from the rear window as possible.

The rear window defogger turns off about fifteen minutesafter the knob is pressed. If turned on again, thedefogger runs for about seven and one-half minutesbefore turning off. If vehicle speed is greater than50 mph (80 kph) and the rear defogger is active, itremains on as long as the speed is greater than 50 mph(80 kph). The defogger can also be turned off byturning off the engine.

Do not use the rear defogger when the convertible topis down.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside ofthe rear window. If you do, you could cut ordamage the warming grid, and the repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attacha temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal oranything similar to the defogger grid.

3-18

Outlet AdjustmentUse the air outlets located in the center and on the sideof the instrument panel to direct the airflow.

The vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust thedirection and amount of airflow inside the vehicle. Movethe louvers up or down or turn them clockwise orcounterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow.

The vehicle has flow through ventilation that allowsoutside air to be forced through the ventilation systemwhen the vehicle is moving. Outside air will enterthe vehicle when the air conditioning fan is running.Flow through ventilation can be stopped in ventand bi-level modes by pressing the recirculation button.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air

inlets at the base of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into the vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objectsto help circulate the air inside of the vehicle moreeffectively.

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention tothe warning lights and gages could prevent injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Somewarning lights come on briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages andwarning lights work together to indicate a problem withthe vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhile driving, or when one of the gages shows theremay be a problem, check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and even dangerous.

3-19

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.

United States Cluster shown, Canada and Turbo model similar

3-20

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

The vehicle’s odometer works together with theDriver Information Center (DIC). For vehicles with a TripA and Trip B odometer, it can be set. See “TripInformation” under DIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-35.

The odometer mileage can be checked while the vehicleis not running. The mileage briefly displays when thedriver’s door is opened.

If the vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, thenew one will be set to the correct mileage total ofthe old odometer.

Tachometer

The tachometerdisplays the enginespeed in revolutionsper minute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operated while thetachometer is in the shaded warning area, thevehicle could be damaged, and the damages wouldnot be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the tachometer in theshaded warning area.

3-21

Safety Belt Reminders

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the engine is started, a chime sounds for severalseconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt,unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light comeson and stays on forseveral seconds, thenflashes for several more.

This chime and light are repeated if the driver remainsunbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driversafety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder LightSeveral seconds after the engine is started, a chimesounds for several seconds to remind the frontpassenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs ifthe passenger airbag is enabled. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-42 for more information. Thepassenger safety belt light, located on the instrumentpanel, comes on and stays on for several seconds andthen flashes for several more.

This chime and light arerepeated if the passengerremains unbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither thechime nor the light comes on.

The front passenger safety belt warning light and chimemay turn on if an object is put on the seat such as abriefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or otherelectronic device. To turn off the warning light and orchime, remove the object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

3-22

Airbag Readiness LightThe system checks the airbag’s electrical system forpossible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicatesthere is an electrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring and the crash sensing anddiagnostic module. For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System on page 1-36.

The airbag readiness lightflashes for a few secondswhen the engine isstarted. If the light doesnot come on then, have itfixed immediately.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on after thevehicle is started or comes on while driving, itmeans the airbag system might not be workingproperly. The airbags in the vehicle might notinflate in a crash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoid injury, have thevehicle serviced right away.

If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbagDriver Information Center (DIC) message can also comeon. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-37for more information.

3-23

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorThe vehicle has the passenger sensing system.See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-42 forimportant safety information. The instrument panel hasa passenger airbag status indicator.

When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag statusindicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for onand off, for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicator willlight either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol tolet you know the status of the right front passengerfrontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passengerairbag status indicator, it means that the right frontpassenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbagstatus indicator, it means that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right front passengerfrontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may bea problem with the lights or the passenger sensingsystem. See your dealer/retailer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on andstays on, it means that something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To help avoid injury toyourself or others, have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-23for more information, including important safetyinformation.


3-24

Charging System Light

This light comes on brieflywhen the ignition key isturned to START, butthe engine is not running,as a check to show itis working.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.

The light should go out once the engine starts. If itstays on, or comes on while driving, there could be aproblem with the charging system. A charging systemmessage in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can alsoappear. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-37for more information. This light could indicate thatthere are problems with a generator drive belt, or thatthere is an electrical problem. Have it checked rightaway. If the vehicle must be driven a short distance withthe light on, turn off accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

Brake System Warning LightThe vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided intotwo parts. If one part is not working, the other part canstill work and stop the vehicle. For good brakingboth parts need to be working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.Have the brake system inspected right away.

This light should come on briefly when the engine isstarted. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn if there is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightalso comes on when the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brake does not fully release.If it stays on after the parking brake is fully released,it means the vehicle has a brake problem.


3-25

If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road andstop carefully. Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased. The pedal might be harder to push or,the pedal could go closer to the floor. It can take longerto stop. Try turning off and restarting the vehicle oneor two times, if the light is still on, have the vehicle towedfor service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-25.

{CAUTION:

The brake system might not be working properly ifthe brake system warning light is on. Driving withthe brake system warning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on after the vehicle hasbeen pulled off the road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed for service.

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light

The Antilock Brake System(ABS) light comes onbriefly when the engine isstarted.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer. If the system is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the lightcomes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safelypossible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engineagain to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needsservice. If the regular brake system warning light is noton, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilockbrakes. If the regular brake system warning light is alsoon, the vehicle does not have antilock brakes andthere is a problem with the regular brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 3-25.

For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), seeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-37 for allbrake related DIC messages.

3-26

Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction Control System(TCS) Indicator/Warning Light

The Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system orthe Traction ControlSystem (TCS)indicator/warning lightcomes on briefly when theengine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by thedealer/retailer. If the system is working normally theindicator light goes off.

This light, along with the appropriate Driver InformationCenter (DIC) messages, indicates when the ESCsystem and the TCS are working or are disabled.

If the light comes on and stays on, the TCS andpotentially the ESC system have been disabled. Checkthe DIC messaging to determine which system isturned off, or not working. If the system is not working,the vehicle needs service. See your dealer/retailer.

When the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is not limited.When the ESC system is disabled, the system does notaid in maintaining vehicle directional control.

If the light comes on and flashes, the TCS or the ESCsystem is actively working. When the LOW TRACTIONmessage appears, the system is limiting wheel spin.When the ESC ACTIVE message appears, the systemis aiding in maintaining vehicle directional control.

See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-6 andTraction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 for moreinformation.

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-37 formore information on the messages associated withthis light.

3-27

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

This light comes on brieflywhile starting the vehicle.


Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperaturewarning light on could cause the vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheating on page 5-29. Thevehicle’s engine could be damaged, and it mightnot be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drivewith the engine coolant temperature warninglight on.

The engine coolant temperature warning light comes onwhen the engine has overheated.

If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soonas possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-29for more information.

Low Coolant Warning Light

This light comes onbriefly when the ignitionis turned on.


Notice: Driving with the low coolant warning lighton could cause the vehicle to overheat. See “EngineOverheating” under Engine Coolant on page 5-25.The vehicle could be damaged and the damagesmight not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

If this light comes on and stays on, the coolant level inthe vehicle is low. If the light is on the vehicle couldhave a serious overheating problem.

See Engine Coolant on page 5-25 for more information.Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

3-28

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with a tirepressure light, this lightcomes on briefly when theengine is started andprovides information abouttire pressures and theTire Pressure MonitoringSystem.

When the Light is On SteadyThis indicates that one or more of the tires is significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), can accompany the light. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-37 for moreinformation. Stop and check the tires as soon as it issafe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate to theproper pressure. See Tires on page 5-47 for moreinformation.

When the Light Flashes First and Then isOn SteadyThis indicates that there could be a problem with theTire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and stays on steady for the remainderof the ignition cycle. This sequence repeats withevery ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 5-54 for more information.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine LightA computer system called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makessure that emissions are at acceptable levels for thelife of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment.

This light comes on whenthe ignition is on, but theengine is not running, asa check to show it isworking. If it does not,have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer.

3-29

If the check engine light comes on and stays on, whilethe engine is running, this indicates that there is anOBD II problem and service is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated by the system beforeany problem is apparent. Heeding the light can preventmore serious damage to the vehicle. This systemassists the service technician in correctly diagnosingany malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with thislight on, after a while, the emission controlsmight not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economymight not be as good, and the engine might notrun as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairsthat might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of the original tireswith other than those of the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emissioncontrols and can cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. Thiscould also result in a failure to pass a requiredEmission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications on page 5-3.

This light comes on during a malfunction in one oftwo ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.A misfire increases vehicle emissions and coulddamage the emission control system on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might be required.

The following can prevent more serious damage to thevehicle:

• Reduce vehicle speed.

• Avoid hard accelerations.

• Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restartthe engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soonas possible.

Light On Steady: An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

3-30

An emission system malfunction might be corrected bydoing the following:

• Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Fillingthe Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose or missing fuel capallows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A fewdriving trips with the cap properly installed shouldturn the light off.

• If the vehicle has been driven through a deeppuddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical systemmight be wet. The condition is usually correctedwhen the electrical system dries out. A few drivingtrips should turn the light off.

• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poorfuel quality causes the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and may cause: stalling afterstart-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed intogear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, orstumbling on acceleration. These conditions mightgo away once the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditions occurs, changethe fuel brand used. It will require at least onefull tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5.

If none of the above have made the light turn off, haveyour dealer/retailer check the vehicle. The dealer/retailerhas the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools tofix any mechanical or electrical problems that might havedeveloped.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormight begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspectioncould prevent getting a vehicle registration.

Here are some things to know to help the vehicle passan inspection:

• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the checkengine light is on with the engine running, or if thekey is in the ON/RUN and the light is not on.

• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if theOBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready for inspection.This can happen if the battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has run down. Thediagnostic system is designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems during normal driving.

3-31

This can take several days of routine driving. If thishas been done and the vehicle still does notpass the inspection for lack of OBD II systemreadiness, your dealer/retailer can preparethe vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. Theengine can become so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soonas possible and have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance candamage the engine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in this manual for changingengine oil.

This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If itdoes not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the indicatorlight then goes off.

If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil isnot flowing through the engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and it might have some other systemproblem.

Security Light

For information regardingthis light and the vehicle’ssecurity system, seeContent Theft-Deterrent onpage 2-12.

3-32

Highbeam On Light

This light comes on whenthe high-beam headlampsare in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-7for more information.

Trunk Ajar Light

This light will come on anda chime will sound if thetrunk is ajar.

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage showshow much fuel the vehiclehas left.

An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of thevehicle the fuel door is on.

Here are four things that customers ask about. None ofthese indicates a problem with the fuel gage:

• At the service station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the fuel gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than thegage indicated. For example, the gage may haveindicated the fuel tank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less than half the fuel tank’scapacity to fill it.

3-33

• The gage moves a little while turning a corner orspeeding up.

• The gage does not go back to empty when theignition is turned off.

For the fuel tank capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-104.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light, below the fuelgage, comes on brieflywhen the engine is started.

This light also comes on when the fuel tank is low onfuel. When fuel is added, the light should go off. Ifit does not, have the vehicle serviced.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).The DIC display gives you the status of many of yourvehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driver

personalization menu modes and warning/statusmessages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.

The DIC buttons arelocated on the left side ofthe steering wheel.

INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll throughthe vehicle information mode displays.

r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicleinformation mode displays, select a personalizationmenu mode setting, or acknowledge a warningmessage.

Press and hold the information and reset buttons at thesame time for one second, then release the buttonsto enter the personalization menu. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-41 for more information.

3-34

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC hasdifferent modes which can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in thefollowing.

Information Modes

INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll throughthe following vehicle information modes:

OdometerPress the information button until the odometer displays.This mode shows the total distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).

To change the DIC display to English or metric units,see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 3-41.

TRIP A or TRIP BPress the information button until TRIP A or TRIP Bdisplay. These modes show the current distancetraveled since the last reset for each trip odometer ineither miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometers canbe used at the same time.

To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold thereset button for a few seconds while the desiredtrip odometer is displayed.

FUEL RANGEPress the information button until FUEL RANGEdisplays. This mode shows the remaining distance youcan drive without refueling in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and thefuel remaining in the tank.

When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW displays.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuel rangeis an average of recent driving conditions. As yourdriving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.

MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVGdisplays. This mode shows how many miles per gallon(mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) yourvehicle is getting based on current and past drivingconditions.

To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold thereset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.Average fuel economy is then calculated startingfrom that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset,it is continually updated each time you drive.

3-35

MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INSTdisplays. This mode shows the current fuel economyat a particular moment and changes frequently asdriving conditions change. This mode shows theinstantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) orliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike averagefuel economy, this screen cannot be reset.

AV (Average) SPEEDPress the information button until AV SPEED displays.This mode shows the vehicle’s average speed inmiles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).

To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold thereset button while AV SPEED is displayed.

OIL LIFEPress the information button until OIL LIFE displays.The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’sremaining useful life. It shows 100% when the systemis reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oilon a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oillife, additional maintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oilon page 5-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

Always reset the engine oil life system after an oilchange. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”under Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19.

COOLANTPress the information button until COOLANT displays.This mode shows the temperature of the enginecoolant in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degreesCelsius (°C).

Tire PressureOn vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed inthe DIC. The tire pressure is shown in either poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Pressthe information button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RFdisplays for the front tires. Press the information buttonagain until LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for therear tires.

If a low tire pressure condition is detected by thesystem while driving, a message advising you tocheck the tire pressure appears in the display. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-37 for more information.

3-36

BOOST (Turbo Only)If your vehicle has this feature, press the informationbutton until BOOST displays. This mode shows agraphic that indicates the amount of boost the engine isreceiving in either pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa).

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages appear if there is a problem detectedin one of your vehicle’s systems.

A message clears when the vehicle’s condition is nolonger present. To acknowledge a message and clear itfrom the display, press and hold any of the DICbuttons. If the condition is still present, the warningmessage comes back on the next time the vehicle isturned off and back on. With most messages, a warningchime sounds when the message displays. Yourvehicle may have other warning messages.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFFThis message displays if the automatic headlampsystem is disabled with the headlamp switch.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ONThis message displays if the automatic headlampsystem is enabled with the headlamp switch.

BRAKE FLUIDThis message displays, while the ignition is on, whenthe brake fluid level is low. The brake system warninglight on the instrument panel cluster also comes on. SeeBrake System Warning Light on page 3-25 for moreinformation. Have the brake system serviced byyour dealer/retailer as soon as possible.

CHANGE OIL SOONThis message displays when the life of the engine oilhas expired and it should be changed.

When this message is acknowledged and cleared fromthe display, the engine oil life system must still bereset separately. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 5-19 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 formore information.

CHECK GAS CAPThis message displays if the fuel cap has not been fullytightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that itis on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properlyinstalled should turn the message off.

CHECK TIRE PRESS (Pressure)On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure inone or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. Ifa tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as

3-37

soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked andset to those shown on the Tire Loading Informationlabel. See Tires on page 5-47, Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-20, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53.The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. SeeDIC Operation and Displays on page 3-35. If the tirepressure is low, the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-29.

COMPETITIVE MODEIf your vehicle has this feature, this message displayswhen the Competitive Driving mode is selected.The Traction Control System (TCS) will not be operatingwhile in the Competitive Driving mode and theESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster will be onsolid. Adjust your driving accordingly. See ElectronicStability Control (ESC) on page 4-6, Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) on page 4-6, and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-27 for moreinformation.

CRUISE ENGAGEDThis message displays when the cruise control systemis active. See Cruise Control on page 3-9 for moreinformation.

DOOR AJARThis message displays if one or more of the vehicle’sdoors are not closed properly. Make sure that thedoor(s) are closed completely.

ENGINE DISABLEDThis message displays if the starting of the engine isdisabled. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer immediately.

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVEIf your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),this message displays and the ESC/TCS light onthe instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC isassisting you with directional control of the vehicle. Youmay feel or hear the system working and see thismessage displayed in the DIC. Slippery road conditionsmay exist when this message is displayed, so adjustyour driving accordingly. This message may stay on fora few seconds after ESC stops assisting you withdirectional control of the vehicle. This is normal whenthe system is operating. See Electronic Stability Control(ESC) on page 4-6 and Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/WarningLight on page 3-27 for more information.

3-38

ESC (Electronic Stability Control)NOT READYIf your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),this message may display briefly after starting thevehicle if the system’s sensors are not yet calibrated.The system is not functional until the messagestops displaying. Adjust your driving accordingly. Whenthe message is no longer displayed, the system isfunctional. See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) onpage 4-6 for more information.

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFFIf your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),this message displays and the ESC/TCS light onthe instrument panel cluster comes on solid when ESCis turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. SeeElectronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-6 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-27 formore information.

KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOWThis message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery inthe transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4.

LEARN COMPLETEOn vehicles without the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system, this message displays when the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS) has completed the tirelearning process. See Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 5-54 for more information.

LOW TRACTIONIf your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),this message displays and the ESC/TCS light onthe instrument panel cluster flashes when the system isactively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditionsmay exist if this message is displayed, so adjustyour driving accordingly. This message stays on for afew seconds after the system stops limiting wheel spin.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-27 formore information.

PARKING BRAKEThis message displays if the parking brake is leftengaged. See Parking Brake on page 2-23 for moreinformation.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when there is a problem with theairbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer immediately.

3-39

SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITYCONTROL)If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),this message displays and a chime sounds if there hasbeen a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCSlight also appears on the instrument panel cluster. Thislight stays on solid as long as the detected problemremains present. When this message displays, thesystem is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-6and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-27for more information.

If this message turns on while you are driving, pull offthe road as soon as possible and stop carefully.Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off andthen back on. If this message still stays on or turns backon again while you are driving, your vehicle needsservice. Have the ESC inspected by your dealer/retaileras soon as possible.

SERVICE TRACTIONIf your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),this message displays and a chime sounds whenthe system is not functioning properly. The ESC/TCSlight also appears on the instrument panel cluster. Thislight stays on solid as long as the detected problemremains present. When this message displays, the

system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-27for more information. Have the TCS serviced byyour dealer/retailer as soon as possible.

SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOROn vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS isnot working properly. The tire pressure light alsoflashes and then remains on during the same ignitioncycle. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-29. Severalconditions may cause this message to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation on page 5-56 for moreinformation. If the warning comes on and stays on, theremay be a problem with the TPMS. See yourdealer/retailer.

TIRE LEARN ONOn vehicles without the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system and with the Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS), this message displays when the TPMSis re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle. The tirepositions must be re-learned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 5-60, Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 5-54, and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-53 for more information.

3-40

TRACTION OFFIf your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),this message displays and the ESC/TCS light onthe instrument panel cluster comes on solid when theTCS is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-27 formore information.

TRUNK AJARThis message displays when the trunk is not closedcompletely. Make sure that the trunk is closedcompletely. See Trunk on page 2-8 and Trunk Ajar Lighton page 3-33.

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationYour vehicle has personalization capabilities that allowyou to program certain features to a preferred setting.All of the features listed may not be available onyour vehicle. Only the features available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for the features were set when yourvehicle left the factory, but may have been changedfrom their default state since that time.

To change feature settings, use the following procedure:

Entering Personalization Menu1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.

To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps are turned off.

2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons atthe same time for one second, then release to enterthe personalization menu.If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),only the UNITS menu will be accessible.

3. Press the information button to scroll through theavailable personalization menu modes.Press the reset button to scroll through the availablesettings for each mode.If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,the display will go back to the previous informationdisplayed.

Personalization Menu ModesOIL LIFE RESETWhen this feature is displayed, you can reset the engineoil life system. To reset the system, see Engine OilLife System on page 5-19. See “OIL LIFE” under DICOperation and Displays on page 3-35 for moreinformation.

3-41

UNITSThis feature allows you to select the units ofmeasurement in which the DIC will display the vehicleinformation. When UNITS appears on the display, pressand hold the reset button for at least one second toscroll through the available settings:

ENGLISH (default in United States): All informationwill be displayed in English units.

METRIC (default in Canada): All information will bedisplayed in metric units.

To select a setting and move on to the next feature,press the information button while the desired setting isdisplayed on the DIC.

TIRE LEARN?This mode is available on vehicles without the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) system and with the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS). After rotating thetires or after replacing a tire or sensor, the TPMS mustre-learn the tire positions. To re-learn the tire positions,see Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-54.See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-60 and DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-37 for moreinformation.

LOCK HORNIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), thisfeature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirpevery time the lock button on the RKE transmitter ispressed, can be enabled or disabled. When LOCKHORN appears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first pressof the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The hornwill still chirp on the second press.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4 for more information.


3-42

UNLOCK HORNIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), thisfeature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp onthe first press of the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter, can be enabled or disabled. When UNLOCKHORN appears on the display, press and hold thereset button for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter.



LIGHT FLASHIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), thisfeature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior hazard/turnsignal lighting to flash every time the lock, unlock,or trunk release buttons on the RKE transmitter arepressed, can be enabled or disabled. When LIGHTFLASH appears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will notflash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons onthe RKE transmitter are pressed.

ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lightingwill flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttonson the RKE transmitter are pressed.



3-43

AUTO UNLK (Unlock)This feature, which allows the vehicle to automaticallyunlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. WhenAUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and holdthe reset button for at least one second to scroll throughthe available settings:

ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock.

NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.You will need to manually unlock the doors.

If you have a manual transmission vehicle, the door(s)will automatically unlock when the key is turned off.

If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, you canselect when the automatic unlocking will occur. See“UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transmission Only)”following.

See Automatic Door Unlock on page 2-7 for moreinformation.


UNLK (Unlock) (AutomaticTransmission Only)This screen displays only if your vehicle has anautomatic transmission and DRIVER or ALL is selectedfor the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determineswhen the automatic door unlocking will occur. WhenUNLK appears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key isturned off.

SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlockwhen the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

See Automatic Door Unlock on page 2-7 for moreinformation.


3-44

EXT (Exterior) LIGHTSIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), thisfeature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior perimeterlighting to turn on each time the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter is pressed, can be enabled ordisabled. When EXT LIGHTS appears on the display,press and hold the reset button for at least one secondto scroll through the available settings:

OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn onwhen the unlock button on the RKE transmitter ispressed.

ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn onwhen the unlock button on the RKE transmitter ispressed.



LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language in whichthe DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears onthe display, press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear inEnglish.

FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.

SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.

GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.

To select a setting and exit out of the personalizationmenu mode, press the information button while thedesired setting is displayed on the DIC.

Exiting Personalization MenuThe personalization menu will be exited when any of thefollowing conditions occur:

• A ten second time period has elapsed.

• The ignition is turned off.

• The end of the personalization menu list is reached.

3-45

Audio System(s)Determine which radio the vehicle has and read thefollowing pages to become familiar with its features.

{CAUTION:

Taking your eyes off the road for extended periodscould cause a crash resulting in injury or death toyou or others. Do not give extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access to many audio and nonaudio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,do the following while the vehicle is parked:

• Become familiar with the operation and controls ofthe audio system.

• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and presetradio stations.

For more information, see Defensive Driving onpage 4-2.

Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before addingany equipment.

Adding audio or communication equipment couldinterfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,radio, or other systems, and could damage them.Follow federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,parking brake, and other functions of your vehicleoperate through the radio/entertainment system.If that equipment is replaced or additional equipmentis added to your vehicle, the chimes may notwork. Make sure that replacement or additionalequipment is compatible with your vehicle beforeinstalling it. See Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3.

The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). WithRAP, the audio system can be played even after theignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 2-17 for more information.

3-46

Setting the Clock

Without Date Display

AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CDPlayerTo set the time:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.

2. Press H until the hour begins flashing on thedisplay. Press H a second time and the minutebegins flashing on the display.

3. While either the hour or the minute numbers areflashing, turn f to increase or decrease the time.

4. Press H again until the clock display stops flashingto set the currently displayed time; otherwise, theflashing stops after five seconds and the currenttime displayed is automatically set.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour, press the H button until 12H or 24H isdisplayed. Once 12H or 24H is displayed, turnthe f knob to the desired option to select the setting.Press the H button again to apply the setting, or let thescreen time out.

With Date Display

Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, andRadio with Single CD (MP3) PlayerTo set the time and date:


2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.

3. Press the softkey located below any one of the tabsthat you want to change.

4. To increase the time or date do one of the following:

• Press the softkey located below the selected tab.

• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.

• Turn f clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date do one of thefollowing:

• Press ©SEEK or s REV.

• Turn f counterclockwise.

The date does not automatically display. To see thedate press H while the radio is on. The date with displaytimes out after a few seconds and goes back to thenormal radio and time display.

3-47

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or to change the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press H and then the softkey located below theforward arrow label. Once the time 12H and 24H,and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, andyear) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)displays.

2. Press the softkey located below the desired option.

3. Press H again to apply the selected default, orlet the screen time out.

Six-Disc CD (MP3) PlayerTo set the time and date:


2. Press MENU.

3. Press the softkey below the H tab. The HR, MIN,MM, DD, YYYY displays.

4. Press the softkey below any one of the tabs youwant to change.

5. To increase the time or date do one of the following:

• Press the softkey located below the selected tab.


• Turn f clockwise.6. To decrease the time or date do one of the

following:

• Press ©SEEK or s REV.


The date does not automatically display. To see thedate press MENU and then softkey below the H tabwhile the radio is on. The date with display timesout after a few seconds and goes back to the normalradio and time display.To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or to change the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press MENU, and then the softkey below theH tab. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.

2. Press the softkey below the forward arrow tab. Thetime 12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY(month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY(day, month, and year) displays.

3. Press the softkey located below the desired option.4. Press MENU again to apply the selected default,

or let the screen time out.

3-48

Radio(s)

The vehicle has one of these radios as its audiosystem.

Radio with CD (Base)

Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown, Radiowith CD (MP3) similar, Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3)

similar

3-49

Radio Data System (RDS)The radio may have RDS. The RDS feature is availablefor use only on FM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only works when theinformation is available. While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display.In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on andoff. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios withthe Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) featureautomatically adjust the radio volume to compensatefor road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volume level is consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.

2. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM tab onthe radio display.

4. Press the softkey under the desired SpeedCompensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,or High) to select the level of radio volumecompensation. The display times out afterapproximately 10 seconds. Each higher settingallows for more radio volume compensation at fastervehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to choose between FM1, FM2, AM, orXM™ (if equipped) on the Radio with CD (Base). Pressto choose between FM, AM, XM (if equipped) on theRadio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, Radio withCD (MP3), or Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3).

f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.

© SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strongsignal in the selected band.

• To seek stations, press and release ©SEEK to goto the previous station and stay there.

• To scan stations, press and hold ©SEEK for afew seconds until the radio beeps once. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press ©SEEK againto stop scanning.

3-50

• To scan preset stations in the selected band, pressand hold ©SEEK for four seconds until a doublebeep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,plays for a few seconds, then goes to the nextstored preset. Press ©SEEK again to stopscanning preset stations.

¨ SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strongsignal in the selected band.

• To seek stations, press and release ¨SEEK to goto the next station and stay there.

• To scan stations, press and hold ¨SEEK for afew seconds until the radio beeps once. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press ¨SEEK againto stop scanning.

• To scan preset stations in the selected band, pressand hold ¨SEEK for four seconds until a doublebeep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,plays for a few seconds, then goes to the nextstored preset. Press ¨SEEK again to stopscanning preset stations.

4 (Information): For vehicles with the Radio with CD(Base), press to switch the display between theradio station frequency and the time. While the ignitionis off, press 4 to display the time.

For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features,press 4 to display additional text information related tothe current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3,WMA song. Song title information will be displayed onthe top line of the display while the artist information willbe displayed on the bottom line, it the information isavailable during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback. Wheninformation is not available, “No Info” displays.

Storing Radio StationsDepending on which radio the vehicle has, radiostations are stored as either favorites or presets.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteRadio that have a FAV button store radio stations asfavorites.

Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favoriteswhile the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favoritestations using the softkeys, favorites button, and steeringwheel controls. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.

3-51

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the six softkeys located belowthe radio station frequency tabs and by using theradio favorites page button (FAV button). Press FAV togo through up to six pages of favorites, each havingsix favorite stations available per page. Each pageof favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, orXM stations. The current balance/fade and tonesettings are also stored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station and set thebalance/fade and tone settings to the desired levels.

2. Press FAV to display the page where to store thestation.

3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beepsounds.

4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be storedas a favorite.

To setup the number of favorites pages:


2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the softkey located below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menu time out, to return tothe original main radio screen showing the radiostation frequency tabs and to begin programmingfavorites.

Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, CD, MP3, andWMA features): If additional information is availablefor the current song being played, Auto Text willautomatically page/scroll the information everythree seconds above the FAV presets on the radiodisplay. By default, Auto Text is enabled.

To change the Auto Text setting:


2. Press the softkey under AUTO TXT tab on the radiodisplay.

3. Press the softkey under the ON or OFF tab on theradio display.

If 4 is pressed and the song title or artist information islonger than what can be displayed, the extrainformation will page every three seconds when AutoText is activated.

3-52

Storing a Radio Station as a PresetRadios that have numbered pushbuttons store radiostations as presets.

If the radio does not have XM, up to 18 stations(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed onthe six numbered buttons.

To store preset stations:

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons forthree seconds until a beep sounds.

3. Repeat the Steps 1 and 2 for each numberedbutton.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): Theradio may display some or all tones such as BASS, MID,and TREB.

To adjust the tone settings on the Radio withCD (Base):

Press f until the tone control labels display, then turnf to change the setting.

To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with CD (MP3)and USB Port, Radio with CD (MP3), or Radio withSix-Disc CD (MP3):

1. Press f until the tone control tabs display.

2. Press the softkey below the desired tab to beadjusted.

3. To increase the level of the bass, midrange,or treble:


• Turn f clockwise.

4. To decrease the level of the bass, midrange,or treble:

• Press ©SEEK, or s REV.


The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position by pressing thesoftkey below the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for morethan two seconds. The radio beeps once and the leveladjusts to the middle position.

The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone andspeaker controls to the middle position by pressingf for more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.

If a station’s frequency is weak, or has static, decreasethe treble.

3-53

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select presetequalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press EQ until Manualdisplays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange,or treble by pressing f .

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)Depending on which radio the vehicle has, theBalance/Fade can be adjusted using f or ` .

To adjust balance or fade using f :

1. Press f until the speaker control tabs display.

2. Press the softkey under the desired tab, or continuepressing f to highlight the desired tab.

3. Turn f to adjust the highlighted setting. Thehighlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressingeither SEEK arrow.

On some radios, \ FWD and s REV can alsobe used to adjust the highlighted level.

To adjust balance or fade using ` :

1. Press ` until the speaker control labels display.

2. Continue pressing ` until the desired speakercontrol label displays.

3. Turn f to adjust the setting. The setting can alsobe adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow,\ FWD, or s REV.

The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fadeto the middle position by pressing the softkey belowthe BAL or FADE tab for more than two seconds. Theradio beeps once and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone andspeaker controls to the middle position by pressingf for more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)

CAT (Category): The radio may have the CAT buttonfeature.

To select and find a desired category:

1. Press BAND until the XM frequency displays.

2. Press CAT to display the category tabs on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT button until thedesired category name displays.

3. Press either of the two softkeys below the desiredcategory tab to immediately tune to the first XMstation associated with that category.

3-54

4. To go to the previous or to the next XM stationwithin the selected category, do one of thefollowing:

• Turn f .

• Press the softkeys below the right or left arrowson the radio display.

• Press ©SEEK or ¨SEEK.

5. To exit the category search mode, press the FAVbutton or BAND button to display the favorites again.

Undesired XM categories can be removed through thesetup menu. To remove an undesired category:


2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab.

3. Turn f to display the category to be removed.

4. Press the softkey below the Remove tab until thecategory name along with the word Removeddisplays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove additional categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe softkey under the Add tab when a removed categorydisplays or by pressing the softkey below the RestoreAll tab.

Categories cannot be removed or added while thevehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: Displays if the radio is no longercalibrated properly for the vehicle. The vehicle must bereturned to your dealer/retailer for service.

Loc or Locked: Displays when the THEFTLOCK®

system has activated. Take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

XM Satellite Radio ServiceXM is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During yourtrial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimitedaccess to XM Radio Online for when you are not in thevehicle. A service fee is required to receive the XMservice. For more information, contact XM atxmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andxmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Radio Messages for XM OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 3-67 for moreinformation.

3-55

Loading a CDRadio’s with a Single CD PlayerInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer pulls it in and the CD begins playing.

When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. Aseach new track starts to play, the track number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

Radio’s with a Six-Disc CD Player

LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player. ThisCD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD:

1. Press and release ^ .

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs:

1. Press and hold ^ for two seconds. A beep soundsand Load All Discs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insertthe discs.

3. Press ^ again to cancel loading more CDs.

Ejecting a CDRadio’s with a Single CD Player

Z EJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is notremoved, after several seconds, the CD automaticallypulls back into the player.

Radio’s with a Six-Disc CD Player

Z EJECT: Press to eject a CD. If the CD is notremoved, after several seconds, the CD automaticallypulls back into the player.

To eject the CD that is currently playing:

1. Press and release Z . The radio beeps once andEjecting Disc displays

2. Once the disc is ejected and Remove Disc displays,remove the CD from the player.

To eject all CDs:

1. Press and hold Z for two seconds. A beepsounds and Ejecting All Discs displays.

2. Once the disc is ejected and Remove Disc displays,remove the CD from the player.

3-56

Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer it stays in the player. When the ignition or radiois turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if itwas the last selected audio source.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currentlyplaying.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the current track,if more than ten seconds have played. Press andhold or press multiple times to continue movingbackward through the tracks on the CD.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press andhold or press multiple times to continue moving forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverseplayback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at areduced volume and the elapsed time of the trackdisplays. Release to resume playing the track.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advanceplayback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at areduced volume and the elapsed time of the trackdisplays. Release to resume playing the track.

RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,rather than sequential order, on one CD or all CDsin a Six-Disc CD player.

To use random on the base radio with Single CD player:

1. Press the softkey below RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.

To use random on a radio with a Six-Disc CD player:

1. To play tracks from all CDs loaded in random order,press the softkey below the RDM tab untilRandomize All Discs displays.

2. To play tracks from the CD currently playing inrandom order, press the softkey below the RDMtab until Random Current Disc displays.

3. To turn off random, press the same softkey again.

BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is playing.The CD remains inside the radio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD whilelistening to the radio. The CD icon and a messageshowing the track number displays when a CD is inthe player. Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary input device,such as a portable audio player. If a portable audioplayer is not connected, No Aux Input Device Foundmay display.

3-57

Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio may have the ability to play an MP3 CD-R orCD-RW disc. See Using an MP3 on page 3-60 formore information.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or theCD comes out, it could be for one of the followingreasons:

• The CD player is very hot. When the temperaturereturns to normal, the CD should play.

• The road is very rough. When the road becomessmoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• A problem may have occurred while burning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down and provide itto your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

Care of CDsStore CD(s) in their original cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CDplayer scans the bottom of the disc. If the bottom ofa CD is damaged it may not play properly or at all. Donot touch the bottom of a CD while handling it. Pickup CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a soft, lint free cloth ordampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergentsolution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure thewiping process starts from the center to the edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the CDplayer. Use a marking pen to write on the top of theCD if a description is needed.Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage theCD player.Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more thanone CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,the CD player could be damaged. While using theCD player, use only CDs in good condition withoutany label, load one CD at a time, and keep theCD player and the loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.If an error displays, see “CD Messages” earlier in thissection.

3-58

Using the Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system may have an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate. This isnot an audio output; do not plug the headphone setinto the front auxiliary input jack. An external audiodevice such as an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player,CD changer, etc. can be connected to the auxiliaryinput jack for use as another audio source.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary devicewhile the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving onpage 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUXbutton to begin playing audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn to adjust the volume.Additional volume adjustments may have to be madefrom the portable device if the volume is too quiet ornot loud.

BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portableaudio device is connected to the auxiliary input.The portable audio device continues playing until it isstopped or turned off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while aportable audio device is connected to the auxiliary input.Press again and the system begins playing audiofrom the connected portable audio player. If a portableaudio player is not connected, No Aux Input Devicemay display.

Using the USB PortRadio’s with a USB port can control a USB storagedevice or an iPod® using the radio buttons and knobs.See Using an MP3 on page 3-60 for informationabout how to connect and control a USB storage deviceor an iPod.

USB SupportThe USB connector is located on the front of the radioand uses the USB 2.0 standard.

USB Supported Devices• USB Flash Drives

• Portable USB Hard Drives

• Fifth generation or later iPod

• First, Second, or Third generation iPod nano

• iPod touch

• iPod classic

3-59

Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware fromApple® for proper operation. iPod firmware can beupdated using the latest iTunes® application. Seeapple.com/itunes.

Using an MP3

FormatRadios that have the capability of playing MP3’s canplay .mp3 files that were recorded onto a CD-R orCD-RW disc. Radios that have a USB port canplay .mp3 and .wma files that are stored on a USBstorage device as well as AAC files that are storedon an iPod®.

Compressed AudioThe radio can play discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio and MP3 files.

Radios with a single CD player read all MP3 files first,then the uncompressed CD audio files.

Radios with a six-CD player only read MP3 files unlessthe CAT button is pressed to toggle to uncompressedaudio files.

CD-R or CD-RW Supported File and FolderStructureThe radio supports:

• Up to 50 folders.

• Up to 8 folders in depth.

• Up to 50 playlists.

• Up to 255 files.

• Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.

• Files with an .mp3 or .cda file extension.

USB Supported File and Folder StructureThe radio supports:

• Up to 700 folders.

• Up to 8 folders in depth.

• Up to 65,535 files.

• Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.

• Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.

• AAC files stored on an iPod.

• FAT16

• FAT32

3-60

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. Files are storedin the root directory when the disc or storage devicedoes not contain folders. Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a CD display as F1 ROOT.

Empty FolderFolders that do not contain files are skipped, and theplayer advances to the next folder that contains files.

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the first playlistand continues sequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the last track of the last playlisthas played, play continues from the first track ofthe first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the first folder andcontinues sequentially through all tracks in eachfolder. When the last track of the last folderhas played, play continues from the first track of thefirst folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display does notautomatically show the new folder name unlessthe folder mode has been chosen as the default display.The new track name displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song name that iscontained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not presentin the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file namewithout the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or four pagesare shortened. The display does not show parts of wordson the last page of text and the extension of thefilename is not displayed.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsCDs that have preprogrammed playlists that werecreated using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or RealJukebox™ software can be accessed, however, there isno playlist editing capability using the radio. Theseplaylists are treated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and arestored on a USB device may be supported by theradio with a USB port.

3-61

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currentlyplaying.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if morethan ten seconds have played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continue moving backwardthrough tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press andhold or press multiple times to continue moving forwardthrough tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverseplayback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volumeand the elapsed time of the file displays. Releases REV to resume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advanceplayback quickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of the file displays.Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

Sc (Previous Folder): Press the softkey belowSc to go to the first track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below c T togo to the first track in the next folder.

RDM (Random): MP3 files can be listened to on a CDin random, rather than sequential order, on one CDor all discs in the Six-Disc CD player. To use random:

1. Press the softkey under the RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays to play songs from the currentCD in random order. Press the same softkeyagain to turn off random play.

2. Press the softkey under the RDM tab untilRandomize All Discs displays to play songs from allCDs loaded in the Six-Disc CD player in randomorder. Press the same softkey again to turnoff random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey belowh to have the files played in order by artist or album.The player scans the disc to sort the files by artistand album ID3 tag information. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc depending on the number offiles on the disc. The radio may begin playing while it isscanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing filesin order by artist. The current artist playing is shownon the second line of the display. Once all songs by thatartist are played, the player moves to the next artist inalphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.

3-62

To listen to files by another artist, press the softkeylocated below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the nextor previous artist in alphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below the arrow tab until thedesired artist displays.

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum:

1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab fromthe sort screen.

3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return tothe main music navigator screen.

The album name displays on the second line betweenthe arrows and songs from the current album beginsto play. Once all songs from that album have played, theplayer moves to the next album in alphabetical orderon the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press the softkeybelow the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.

Connecting a USB Storage Device oriPod®

The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USBstorage device.

To connect a USB storage device, connect the deviceto the USB port located on the front of the radio.

To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cablethat came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connectorand connect the other end to the USB port locatedon the front of the radio. If the vehicle is on and the USBconnection works, “OK to disconnect” and a GM logomay appear on the iPod and iPod appears on the radio’sdisplay. The iPod music appears on the radio’s displayand begins playing.

The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle ifthe vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPodautomatically powers off and will not charge or drawpower from the vehicle’s battery.

If you have an older iPod model that is not supported, itcan still be used by connecting it to the AuxiliaryInput Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) stereocable. See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlierfor more information.

3-63

Using the Radio to Control a USBStorage Device or iPodThe radio can control a USB storage device or an iPodusing the radio buttons and knobs and display songinformation on the radio’s display.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if morethan ten seconds have played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continue moving backwardthrough tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press andhold or press multiple times to continue moving forwardthrough tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverseplayback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.Release s REV to resume playing. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advanceplayback quickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release \ FWD to resume playing. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

4 (Information): Press to display additional informationabout the selected track.

Using Softkeys to Control a USBStorage Device or iPodThe five softkeys below the radio display are used tocontrol the functions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio displayto display the functions listed below, or press thesoftkey below the function if it is currently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function onit to use that function.

j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause thetrack. The tab appears raised when pause is being used.Press the softkey below j again to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go backto the main display screen on an iPod, or the rootdirectory on a USB storage device.

c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c toview the contents of the current folder on the USB drive.To browse and select files:

1. Press the softkey below c .

2. Turn f to scroll through the list of folders.

3-64

3. Press f to select the desired folder. If there ismore then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 untilthe desired folder is reached.

4. Turn f to scroll through the files in the selectedfolder.

5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.

To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be usedto navigate in the following order:

• First softkey, first item in the list.

• Second softkey, 20% through the list.

• Third softkey, 40% through the list.

• Fourth softkey, 60% through the list.

• Fifth softkey, 80% through the list.

h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey belowh to view and select a file on an iPod, usingthe iPod’s menu system. Files are sorted by:

• Playlists

• Artists

• Albums

• Genres

• Songs

• Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey below h .

2. Turn f to scroll through the list of menus.

3. Press f to select the desired menu.

4. Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in theselected menu.

5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.

To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be usedto navigate in the following order:

• First softkey, first item in the list.

• Second softkey, 20% through the list.

• Third softkey, 40% through the list.

• Fourth softkey, 60% through the list.

• Fifth softkey, 80% through the list.

3-65

Repeat FunctionalityTo use Repeat:

Press the softkey below " or ' to select betweenRepeat All and Repeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeatall tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat Allis being used. This is the default mode when aUSB storage device or iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below ' torepeat one track. The tab appears raised when RepeatTrack is being used.

Shuffle FunctionalityTo use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below > , 2 , < or = to selectbetween Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs,Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): Press the softkey below 2 to turnshuffle off. This is the default mode when a USB storagedevice or iPod is first connected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Press thesoftkey below = or < to shuffle all songs on the USBstorage device or iPod.

< (Shuffle Album): Press the softkey below > toshuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below > toshuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storagedevice.

3-66

XM Radio Messages

XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, orany others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver isbeing updated, and no action is required. This processshould take no longer than 30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, butthe vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area, thesignal should return.

Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring andprocessing audio and text data. No action is needed.This message should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently inservice. Tune in to another channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot bereceived with your XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel isno longer assigned. Tune to another station. If thisstation was one of the presets, choose another stationfor that preset button.

No Artist Info: No artist information is available at thistime on this channel. The system is working properly.

No Title Info: No song title information is available atthis time on this channel. The system is working properly.

No CAT Info: No category information is available atthis time on this channel. The system is working properly.

No Information: No text or informational messages areavailable at this time on this channel. The system isworking properly.

CAT Not Found: There are no channels available forthe selected category. The system is working properly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM™ receiver in your vehiclecould have previously been in another vehicle. Forsecurity purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swappedbetween vehicles. If this message is received afterhaving your vehicle serviced, check with yourdealer/retailer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this messagealternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate the service.

Unknown: If this message is received when tuned tochannel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consultwith your dealer/retailer.

Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clearwithin a short period of time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

3-67

XM Not Available: If this message does not clearwithin a short period of time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Bluetooth®

Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetoothcapable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. The system can be usedwhile the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetooth system can be upto 30 ft. (9.1 m). Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones are guaranteed to work withthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See gm.com/bluetoothfor more information on compatible phones.

Voice RecognitionThe Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpretvoice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum. Thesystem may not recognize voice commands if there istoo much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the systemresponds indicating when it is waiting for a voicecommand. Wait until the tone and then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and naturalvoice.

Audio SystemWhen using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, soundcomes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakersand overrides the audio system. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.The adjusted volume level remains in memory for latercalls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level isused if the volume is turned down too low.

Bluetooth ControlsUse the buttons located on the steering wheel tooperate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See AudioSteering Wheel Controls on page 3-79 for moreinformation.

bg (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,to confirm system information, and to start speechrecognition.

cx (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject acall, or to cancel an operation.

PairingA Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to thein-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected tothe vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not

3-68

connected, calls will be made using OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStarowner’s guide for more information.

Pairing Information:

• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicleBluetooth system.

• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle ismoving.

• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically linkswith the first available paired cell phone in theorder the phone was paired.

• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to thein-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.

• Pairing should only need to be completed once,unless changes to the pairing information havebeen made or the phone is deleted.

To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to aDifferent Phone later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The systemresponds with “Ready” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.

3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructionsand a four digit PIN number. The PIN number willbe used in Step 4.

4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that willbe paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phonemanufacturers user guide for information onthis process.Locate the device named “General Motors” in thelist on the cellular phone and follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter the four digit PINnumber that was provided in Step 3.

5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Usea name that best describes the phone. This namewill be used to indicate which phone is connected.The system then confirms the name provided.

6. The system responds with “<Phone name> hasbeen successfully paired” after the pairing processis complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones tobe paired.

Listing All Paired and Connected Phones

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. Thesystem responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.


3-69

3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetoothdevices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, thesystem will say “Is connected” after the connectedphone.

Deleting a Paired Phone



3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone todelete followed by a tone.

4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If thephone name is unknown, use the “List” commandfor a list of all paired phones. The system respondswith “Would you like to delete <phone name>?Yes or No” followed by a tone.

5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The systemresponds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.

Linking to a Different Phone



3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with“Please wait while I search for other phones”.

• If another phone is found, the response will be“<Phone name> is now connected”.

• If another phone is not found, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing Name TagsThe system can store up to thirty phone numbers asname tags that are shared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.

The system uses the following commands to store andretrieve phone numbers:

• Store

• Digit Store

• Directory

Using the Store CommandThe store command allows a phone number to bestored without entering the digits individually.


2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,number please” followed by a tone.

3-70

3. Say the complete phone number to be stored atonce with no pauses.

• If the system recognizes the number it respondswith “OK, Storing” and repeats the phonenumber.

• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phonenumber, it responds with “Store” and repeatsthe number followed by “Please say yes or no”.If the number is correct, say “Yes”. If thenumber is not correct, say “No”. The system willask for the number to be re-entered.

4. After the system stores the phone number, itresponds with “Please say the name tag” followedby a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The nametag is recorded and the system responds with“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.

• If the name tag does not sound correct, say“No” and repeat Step 5.

• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” andthe name tag is stored. After the number isstored the system returns to the main menu.

Using the Digit Store CommandThe digit store command allows a phone number to bestored by entering the digits individually.


2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with“Please say the first digit to store” followed bya tone.

3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system willrepeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.Continue entering digits until the number to bestored is complete.

• If an unwanted number is recognized by thesystem, say “Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

• To hear all of the numbers recognized by thesystem, say “Verify” at any time and thesystem will repeat them.

4. After the complete number has been entered, say“Store”. The system responds with “Please say thename tag” followed by a tone.

3-71

5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The nametag is recorded and the system responds with“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.

• If the name tag does not sound correct, say“No” and repeat Step 5.

• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” andthe name tag is stored. After the number isstored the system returns to the main menu.

Using the Directory CommandThe directory command lists all of the name tags storedby the system. To use the directory command:


2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with“Directory” and then plays back all of the storedname tags. When the list is complete, the systemreturns to the main menu.

Deleting Name TagsThe system uses the following commands to deletename tags:

• Delete

• Delete all name tags

Using the Delete CommandThe delete command allows specific name tags to bedeleted.

To use the delete command:


2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,please say the name tag” followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The systemresponds with “Would you like to delete, <nametag>? Please say yes or no”.

• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete thename tag. The system responds with “OK,deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”

• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The systemresponds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please saythe name tag.”

3-72

Using the Delete All Name Tags CommandThe delete all name tags command deletes all storedphone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar,if present.

To use the delete all name tags command:


2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system respondswith “You are about to delete all name tags storedin your phone directory and your route destinationdirectory. Are you sure you want to do this? Pleasesay yes or no.”

• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.

• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to themain menu.

Making a CallCalls can be made using the following commands:

• Dial

• Digit Dial

• Call

• Re-dial

Using the Dial Command


2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using<phone name>. Number please” followed by a tone.

3. Say the entire number without pausing.

• If the system recognizes the number, it respondswith “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.

• If the system does not recognize the number, itconfirms the numbers followed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say “Yes”. The systemresponds with “OK, Dialing” and dials thenumber. If the number is not correct, say “No”.The system will ask for the number to bere-entered.

Using the Digit Dial Command


2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digitdial using <phone name>, please say the first digitto dial” followed by a tone.

3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Followingeach digit, the system will repeat back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

3-73

4. Continue entering digits until the number to bedialed is complete. After the whole number hasbeen entered, say “Dial”. The system respondswith “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.

• If an unwanted number is recognized by thesystem, say “Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

• To hear all of the numbers recognized by thesystem, say “Verify” at any time and thesystem will repeat them.

Using the Call Command


2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followedby a tone.

3. Say the name tag of the person to call.

• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” anddials the number.

• If the system is unsure it recognizes the rightname tag, it confirms the name tag followedby a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.The system responds with “OK, calling,<name tag>” and dials the number. If the nametag is not correct, say “No”. The system willask for the name tag to be re-entered.

Once connected, the person called will be heardthrough the audio speakers.

Using the Re-dial Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system respondswith “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials thelast number called from the connected Bluetoothphone.

Once connected, the person called will be heardthrough the audio speakers.

3-74

Receiving a CallWhen an incoming call is received, the audio systemmutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.

• Press c x to ignore a call.

Call WaitingCall waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.

• Press b g to answer an incoming call whenanother call is active. The original call is placedon hold.

• Press b g again to return to the original call.

• To ignore the incoming call, continue with theoriginal call with no action.

• Press c x to disconnect the current call andswitch to the call on hold.

Three-Way CallingThree-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetoothphone and enabled by the wireless service carrierto work.

1. While on a call press b g . The system respondswith “Ready” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.

3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number ofthe third party to be called.

4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link allthe callers together.

Ending a Call

Press c x to end a call.

3-75

Muting a CallDuring a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can bemuted so that the person on the other end of thecall cannot hear them.

To Mute a call

1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with “Callmuted”.

To Cancel Mute


2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The systemresponds with “Resuming call”.

Transferring a CallAudio can be transferred between the in-vehicleBluetooth system and the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the Cell PhoneDuring a call with the audio in the vehicle:


2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with“Transferring call” and the audio will switch fromthe vehicle to the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the In-VehicleBluetooth SystemThe cellular phone must be paired and connected withthe Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.The connection process can take up to two minutes afterthe key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition.

During a call with the audio on the cell phone,press b g for more than two seconds. The audioswitches from the cell phone to the vehicle.

3-76

Voice Pass-ThruVoice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognitioncommands on the cell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide to see if the cell phonesupports this feature. This feature can be used toverbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.



3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK,accessing <phone name>”.

• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages willgo through its cycle according to the phone’soperating instructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)TonesThe in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers andnumbers stored as name tags during a call. This isused when calling a menu driven phone system.Account numbers can be programmed into thephonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls.

Sending a Number During a Call


2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say anumber to send tones” followed by a tone.

3. Say the number to send.

• If the system clearly recognizes the number itresponds with “OK, Sending Number” and thedial tones are sent and the call continues.

• If the system is not sure it recognized thenumber properly, it responds “Dial Number,Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say “Yes”. The systemresponds with “OK, Sending Number” and thedial tones are sent and the call continues.

Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call

1. Press bg . The system responds with “Ready”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Send name tag.” The system respondswith “Say a name tag to send tones” followedby a tone.

3-77

3. Say the name tag to send.

• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” andthe dial tones are sent and the call continues.

• If the system is not sure it recognized the nametag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If thename tag is correct, say “Yes”. The systemresponds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” andthe dial tones are sent and the call continues.

Clearing the SystemUnless information is deleted out of the in-vehicleBluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in the phonebookand phone pairing information. For information on howto delete this information, see the above sectionson Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.

Other InformationThe Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by theBluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks byGeneral Motors is under license. Other trademarks andtrade names are those of their respective owners.








Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of thevehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). The radio does not operateif it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.

3-78

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Vehicles with audiosteering wheel controlscould differ dependingon the vehicle’s options.Some audio controlscan be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

e + / e − (Volume): Press to increase or to decreasethe radio volume.

w / x (Next / Previous): Press to change radiostations, select tracks on a CD, or to select tracks andnavigate folders on an iPod® or USB device.

To change radio stations:

• Press and release w or x to go to the next orprevious radio station stored as a preset.

• Press and hold w or x to go to the next orprevious radio station in the selected band with astrong signal.

To select tracks on a CD:

Press and release w or x to go to the next orprevious track.

To select tracks on an iPod or USB device:

1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a songuntil the contents of the current folder display onthe radio display.

2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down thelist, then press and hold w to play the highlightedtrack.

To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device:

1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a songuntil the contents of the current folder display onthe radio display.

2. Press and hold x to go back to the previousfolder list.

3. Press and release w or x to scroll up or downthe list.

• To select a folder, press and hold w when thefolder is highlighted.

• To go back further in the folder list, press andhold x .

3-79

c (End): Press to reject an incoming call, or end acurrent call.

bg (Mute / Voice Recognition): Press to silencethe vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn thesound on.

For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems pressand hold b g for longer than two seconds tointeract with those systems. See OnStar® System onpage 2-30 and Bluetooth® on page 3-68 for moreinformation.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static can occur duringnormal radio reception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and externalelectronic devices are plugged into the accessorypower outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stations boost thepower levels during the day, and then reduce theselevels during the night. Static can also occur when thingslike storms and power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, try reducing the treble onthe radio.

FM StereoFM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electroniccircuit that automatically works to reduce interference,some static can occur, especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio receptionfrom coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings orhills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causingthe sound to fade in and out. In addition, travelingor standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, ortunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a periodof time.

3-80

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may cause interference with thevehicle’s radio. This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’sbattery, or simply having the phone on. This interferencecauses an increased level of static while listening tothe radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washeswithout being damaged as long as it is securelyattached to the base. If the mast becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent,replace it.

Occasionally check to make sure the antenna istightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten byhand, until fully seated plus one quarter turn.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roofor the rear of the vehicle. Keep the antenna clearof obstructions for clear radio reception.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio may be used to adjust the vehicle’s chimelevel. If the radio can be used to change the volumelevel of the chime, press and hold the sixth numberedpushbutton or the sixth FAV pushbutton with the ignitionon and the radio power off. The volume level changesbetween Normal and Loud. The selected volumelevel appears on the radio display.

Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factoryradio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes.

3-81

✍ NOTES

3-82

Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............4-2Driving for Better Fuel Economy .......................4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunk Driving .................................................4-3Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3Braking .........................................................4-4Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-4Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......................4-6Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-8Limited-Slip Rear Axle ...................................4-10Steering ......................................................4-10Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11Passing .......................................................4-12Loss of Control .............................................4-12

Driving at Night ............................................4-13Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-14Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-15Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-15Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-16Winter Driving ..............................................4-17If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,

or Snow ...................................................4-19Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-20Loading the Vehicle ......................................4-20

Towing ..........................................................4-25Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-25Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-25Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-25

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, andthe Vehicle

Driving for Better Fuel EconomyDriving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are somedriving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.

• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.

• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.

• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.

• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,use cruise control, if equipped.

• Always follow posted speed limits or drive moreslowly when conditions require.

• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.

• Combine several trips into a single trip.

• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPCSpec number molded into the tire’s sidewall nearthe size.

• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “always expect theunexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is towear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-6.

{CAUTION:

Assume that other road users (pedestrians,bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. In addition:

• Allow enough following distance between youand the driver in front of you.

• Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting ininjury or possible death. These simple defensivedriving techniques could save your life.

4-2

Drunk Driving

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Yourreflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgmentcan be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.You can have a serious — or even fatal — collisionif you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride homein a cab; or if you are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving isa global tragedy.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive avehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, andattentiveness.

Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is against the law in everyU.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive.

Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’ssystem can make crash injuries worse, especiallyinjuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has been drinking — driveror passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabled is higher than if theperson had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems help to control the vehiclewhile driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systems than the tiresand road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control ofthe vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 4-8 and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)on page 4-6.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectvehicle performance. See Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3.

4-3

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 3-25.

Braking action involves perception time and reactiontime. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three seconds ormore with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenthe vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road, whether it is pavementor gravel; the condition of the road, whether it iswet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This isa mistake. The brakes might not have time to coolbetween hard stops. The brakes will wear out muchfaster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the

traffic and allowing realistic following distanceseliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakesare pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down. Ifthe engine stops, there will still be some power brakeassist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Oncethe power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectvehicle performance. See Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3.

Antilock Brake System (ABS)This vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC)with the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that will help prevent abraking skid.

When the engine is started and the vehicle begins todrive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motoror clicking noise might be heard while this test is goingon, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedalmoves a little. This is normal.

4-4

If there is a problem withABS, this warning lightstays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS)Warning Light onpage 3-26.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. Ifone of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, asrequired, faster than any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, the computer keepsreceiving updates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to geta foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stoppingdistance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if thatvehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump ormotor operating might be heard and the brake pedalpulsating might be felt, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help more thaneven the very best braking.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed toassist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speedin emergency driving conditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brake control module tosupplement the power brake system under conditionswhere the driver has quickly and forcefully appliedthe brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slowdown the vehicle. The stability system hydraulicbrake control module increases brake pressure at eachcorner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minorbrake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during thistime is normal and the driver should continue toapply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictatesThe Brake Assist feature will automatically disengagewhen the brake pedal is released or brake pedalpressure is quickly decreased.

4-5

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)The vehicle has an Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system which combines antilock brake, tractionand stability control systems and helps the drivermaintain directional control of the vehicle in most drivingconditions.

ESC activates when the computer senses a discrepancybetween the intended path and the direction thevehicle is actually traveling. ESC selectively appliesbraking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s brakes tohelp steer the vehicle in the desired direction.

When you first start the vehicle and begin to drive away,the system performs several diagnostic checks toensure there are no problems. The system may beheard or felt while it is working. This is normal and doesnot mean there is a problem with the vehicle. Thesystem should initialize before the vehicle reaches20 mph (32 km/h).

If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCSlight comes on, and the ESC OFF and/or SERVICE ESCmessage displays.

For more information, see Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 3-34.

This light flashes on theinstrument panel clusterwhile the ESC systemis both on and activated.

When the system activates, an ESC ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC. The system may be heard orfelt while it is working; this is normal. Continue to steerthe vehicle in the intended direction.

When the light comes on and the message(s) SERVICEESC, ESC OFF, or both are displayed, the systemwill not assist the driver in maintaining directional controlof the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system isautomatically enabled whenever the vehicle is started. Toassist the driver with vehicle directional control, especiallyin slippery road conditions, the system should always beleft on. But, ESC can be turned off if needed.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when the systembegins to assist the driver maintain directional control ofthe vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and thecruise control will automatically disengage. The cruisecontrol system may be reengaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control on page 3-9.

4-6

The ESC/TCS buttonis located on theinstrument panel.

To turn the traction control system off or back on, pressand release the ESC/TCS button. To disable bothtraction control and ESC, press and hold the button untilTRACTION OFF and ESC OFF messages appear,and the ESC/TCS light comes on.It is recommended to leave the system on for normaldriving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn thesystem off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice orsnow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt tofree it. It may also be necessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-road conditions where highwheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck inSand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-19. Also, see“Competitive Driving Mode” later in this section.ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines thata problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF andSERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light will beon solid to warn the driver that ESC is disabled andrequires service. If the problem does not clear afterrestarting the vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for service.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-37 formore information.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectthe vehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3 for more information.

Competitive Driving ModeThe driver can select this optional handling mode bypressing the ESC/TCS button on the console two timesquickly. COMPETITIVE MODE displays in the DIC. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-37 for moreinformation. Competitive Driving Mode allows the driverto have full control of the rear wheels while the ESCsystem helps maintain directional control of the vehicle byselective brake application. The ESC/TCS light will be onand the traction control system will not be operating.Adjust your driving accordingly. This electronic stabilitycontrol mode is recommended only for use during closedtrack events and competitive driving venues.

When the ESC/TCS button is pressed again, or thevehicle is restarted, the ESC and TCS turn back on.

Notice: When traction control is turned off, orCompetitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible tolose traction. If you attempt to shift with the drivewheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possibleto cause damage to the transmission. Do notattempt to shift when the drive wheels do not havetraction. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicleis not covered. See the warranty book for additionalinformation.

4-7

Traction Control System (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) thatlimits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slipperyroad conditions. The system operates only if it sensesthat the rear wheels are spinning too much or arebeginning to lose traction. When this happens, thesystem works the rear brakes and reduces engine powerby closing the throttle and managing engine spark tolimit wheel spin.

This light will flash whenthe traction control systemis limiting wheel spin.

The system may be heard or felt while it is working, butthis is normal.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins tolimit wheel spin, the ESC/TCS light will flash andthe cruise control will automatically disengage. Thecruise control may be reengaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control on page 3-9.

When this light is on solidand either the SERVICETRACTION or TRACTIONOFF message isdisplayed, the system willnot limit wheel spin.

Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-37 for more information.

The Traction Control System is automatically enabledwhenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel spin,especially in slippery road conditions, always leave thesystem enabled. TCS can be turned off if needed.

It is recommended to leave the system on for normaldriving conditions, but it may be necessary to turnthe system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice orsnow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt tofree it. It may also be necessary to turn off thesystem when driving in extreme off-road conditionswhere high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicleis Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-19.

4-8

To turn the system off oron, press and release theESC/TCS button locatedon the instrument panel.

The DIC will display the appropriate message the buttonis pressed.

Traction Control OperationTraction control limits wheel spin by reducing enginepower to the wheels (engine speed management)and by applying brakes to each individual wheel(brake-traction control) as necessary.

The traction control system is enabled automaticallywhen the vehicle is started, and it will activate and flashthe ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTIONmessage if it senses either of the rear wheels arespinning or beginning to lose traction while driving. Formore information on the LOW TRACTION message,see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-34.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle are allowed tospin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and Brakewarning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/orSERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed, thedifferential could be damaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce enginepower and do not spin the wheel(s) excessivelywhile these lights and this message are displayed.

Notice: When traction control is turned off, orCompetitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible tolose traction. If you attempt to shift with the drivewheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possibleto cause damage to the transmission. Do notattempt to shift when the drive wheels do not havetraction. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicleis not covered. See the warranty book for additionalinformation.

The traction control system may activate on dry orrough roads or under conditions such as heavyacceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshiftsof the transmission. When this happens, a reductionin acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibrationmay be heard. This is normal.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectthe vehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3 for more information.

4-9

Limited-Slip Rear AxleVehicles with a limited slip rear axle can give moretraction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works likea standard axle most of the time, but when tractionis low, this feature will allow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

During a sudden shift, such as shifting from 1 (First) to2 (Second) gear at low engine speeds or suddenlyapplying the clutch, a clunking or rattling noise may beheard or felt. This is normal.

Steering

Power SteeringIf power steering assist is lost because the engine stopsor the system is not functioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tiresand the road surface, the angle at which the curve isbanked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed isthe one factor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before enteringthe curve, while the front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Waitto accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerategently into the straightaway.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pullsout from nowhere, or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front of you. Theseproblems can be avoided by braking — if you can stopin time. But sometimes you cannot stop in timebecause there is no room. That is the time for evasiveaction — steering around the problem.

The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-4.It is better to remove as much speed as possiblefrom a collision. Then steer around the problem, to theleft or right depending on the space available.

4-10

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turneda full 180 degrees very quickly without removingeither hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, andjust as quickly straighten the wheel once you haveavoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of aroad onto the shoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of thepavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches,8 to 13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right fronttire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steeringwheel to go straight down the roadway.

4-11

PassingPassing another vehicle on a two-lane road can bedangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:

• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroadsfor situations that might affect a successful pass. Ifin doubt, wait.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your sideof the lane.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.

• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.

• When you are being passed, ease to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route or area ofless danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not overdrivingthose conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s threecontrol systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are notrolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speedor steering in a curve causes tires to slip and losecornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too muchthrottle causes the driving wheels to spin.

Remember: The Traction Control System (TCS) helps toavoid only the acceleration skid. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-8. If the TCS system isoff, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easingyour foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready fora second skid if it occurs.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system mightactivate. See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) onpage 4-6.

4-12

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slowdown and adjust your driving to these conditions. It isimportant to slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shiftingto a lower gear. Any sudden changes could causethe tires to slide. You might not realize the surface isslippery until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognizewarning clues — such as enough water, ice, orpacked snow on the road to make a mirroredsurface — and slow down when you have any doubt.

Even though the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control(ESC) with Antilock Brake System (ABS), remember:ABS helps avoid only the braking skid.

If the ABS is ever disabled, in a braking skid, where thewheels are no longer rolling, release enough pressureon the brakes to get the wheels rolling again. Thisrestores steering control. Push the brake pedal downsteadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long as thewheels are rolling, you will have steering control.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day drivingbecause some drivers are likely to be impaired — byalcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or byfatigue.

Night driving tips include:

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the insiderearview mirror.

• Slow down and keep more space between you andother vehicles because headlamps can only light upso much road ahead.

• Watch for animals.

• When tired, pull off the road.

• Do not wear sunglasses.

• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.

• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out.

• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns orcurves.

4-13

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But, as we get older, these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

Driving in Rain and on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reduce vehicle tractionand affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Alwaysdrive slower in these types of driving conditionsand avoid driving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might notwork as well in a quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You could lose control of thevehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of water or acar/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal untilthe brakes work normally.



Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.Driving through flowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If this happens, youand other vehicle occupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and be very cautious abouttrying to drive through flowing water.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up underyour vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou are going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. Thebest advice is to slow down when the road is wet.

4-14

Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wet weather driving tipsinclude:

• Allow extra following distance.

• Pass with caution.

• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.

• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tireson page 5-47.

• Turn off cruise control.

Before Leaving on a Long TripTo prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider havingit serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.

Things to check on your own include:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windowsclean — inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: In good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?

• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?

• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated torecommended pressure?

• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?Have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention to your surroundingswhile driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicle and rest.

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

• Keep interior temperature cool.

• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road aheadand to the sides.

• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instrumentsoften.

4-15

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or through mountains is differentthan driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for drivingin these conditions include:

• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.

• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, coolingsystem, and transmission.

• Going down steep or long hills, shift to alower gear.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes could get sohot that they would not work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even none going down a hill.You could crash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignitionoff is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all thework of slowing down and they could get so hotthat they would not work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even none going down a hill.You could crash. Always have the engine runningand the vehicle in gear when going downhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cutacross the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in yourlane (stalled car, accident).

• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocksarea, winding roads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

4-16

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or IceDrive carefully when there is snow or ice between thetires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet icecan occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rainbegins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerategently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quicklycauses the wheels to spin and makes the surface underthe tires slick, so there is even less traction.

Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate toofast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surfaceunder the tires even more.

The Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads, butslow down and adjust your driving to the roadconditions. When driving through deep snow, turn offthe traction control system to help maintain vehiclemotion at lower speeds.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-4 improvesvehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads,but apply the brakes sooner than when on drypavement.

Allow greater following distance on any slippery roadand watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur onotherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surfaceof a curve or an overpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking while on ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.

4-17

Blizzard ConditionsBeing stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Staywith the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6. Toget help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:

• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-5.

• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:• Clear away snow from around the base of

your vehicle, especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

• Check again from time to time to be suresnow does not collect there.



• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) onthe side of the vehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

• Fully open the air outlets on or under theinstrument panel.

• Adjust the Climate Control system to a settingthat circulates the air inside the vehicle andset the fan speed to the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in the Index.

For more information about carbon monoxide, seeEngine Exhaust on page 2-27.

Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gasto get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle, especially anythat is blocking the exhaust.

Run the engine for short periods only as needed tokeep warm, but be careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods asneeded to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine offand close the window most of the way to save heat.

4-18

Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feelreally uncomfortable from the cold. Moving aboutto keep warm also helps.

If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and thenwhen you run the engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idlespeed. This keeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible to save fuel.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowSlowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free thevehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. SeeRocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-20.

If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help tofree a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s tractionsystem in the Index. If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn the traction system offand use the rocking method.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,they can explode, and you or others could beinjured. The vehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or other damage. Spinthe wheels as little as possible and avoid goingabove 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,see Tire Chains on page 5-70.

4-19

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutTurn the steering wheel left and right to clear thearea around the front wheels. Turn off any traction orstability system. Shift back and forth betweenR (Reverse) and a forward gear, or with a manualtransmission, between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) andR (Reverse), spinning the wheels as little as possible.To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and press lightly on the acceleratorpedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forward and reversedirections causes a rocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after afew tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicledoes need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle onpage 4-25.

Loading the VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it may properly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and the Certificationlabel.

{CAUTION:

Do not load the vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front or rear Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, and it can change theway your vehicle handles. These could causeyou to lose control and crash. Also,overloading can shorten the life of thevehicle.

4-20

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar)of your vehicle. With the driver’s door open, youwill find the label attached below the doorlatch. This label shows the number of occupantseating positions (A), and the maximum vehiclecapacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 5-47 and Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-53.

There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification label. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rearaxle. See “Certification Label” later in thissection.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

Label Example

4-21

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.Your vehicle is neither designed nor intendedto tow a trailer.

Item Description Total

AVehicle CapacityWeight forExample 1 =

400 lbs (181 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight @ 150 lbs(68 kg) x 1 =

150 lbs (68 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1

4-22



400 lbs (181 kg)


300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 100 lbs (45 kg)



400 lbs (181 kg)


400 lbs (181 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Example 2 Example 3

4-23

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is attached tothe rear edge of the driver’s door or the vehicle’scenter pillar (B-pillar) below the driver’s door latch.

It tells you the gross weight capacity of yourvehicle, called the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Neverexceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either thefront or rear axle.

{CAUTION:

Do not load the vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front or rear Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, and it can change theway your vehicle handles. These could causeyou to lose control and crash. Also,overloading can shorten the life of thevehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

4-24

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash.

• Put things in the rear area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so that someof them are above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleTo avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towedwith all four wheels off the ground. Consult yourdealer/retailer or a professional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-6.

Recreational Vehicle TowingNotice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing the vehiclemay cause damage because of reduced groundclearance. Always put the vehicle on a flatbed truckor trailer.

The vehicle was neither designed nor intended to betowed with any of its wheels on the ground. If the vehiclemust be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlier inthis section.

Towing a TrailerThe vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow atrailer.

4-25

✍ NOTES

4-26

Service ............................................................5-3Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4Adding Equipment to the Outside of the

Vehicle ......................................................5-5Fuel ................................................................5-5

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5California Fuel ...............................................5-6Additives .......................................................5-6Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10Hood Release ..............................................5-11Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12Engine Oil ...................................................5-15Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-19Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-21Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-22Manual Transmission Fluid .............................5-23Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-23Cooling System ............................................5-23Engine Coolant .............................................5-25

Engine Overheating .......................................5-29Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-30Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-31Brakes ........................................................5-32Battery ........................................................5-35Jump Starting ...............................................5-36

Rear Axle .......................................................5-40Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-41Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-42

Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-42Headlamps ..................................................5-42Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps ......5-43Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps

(Base Level) .............................................5-43Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps

(Removable Hardtop) .................................5-44Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-44License Plate Lamp ......................................5-45Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-45

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-46Tires ..............................................................5-47

Winter Tires .................................................5-48Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-49Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-50Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-53

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-54Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-56Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-60When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-62Buying New Tires .........................................5-63Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-65Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-65Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-67Wheel Replacement ......................................5-67Tire Chains ..................................................5-70If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-70Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit

(Without Selector Switch) ............................5-71Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit

(With Selector Switch) ................................5-80Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage .........5-89

Appearance Care ............................................5-90Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-90Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-91Leather .......................................................5-92Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ..................................................5-92Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-93Weatherstrips ...............................................5-93

Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-93Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-94Finish Care ..................................................5-94Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-95Convertible Top ............................................5-95Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels

and Trim ..................................................5-96Tires ...........................................................5-96Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-97Finish Damage .............................................5-97Underbody Maintenance ................................5-97Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-97

Vehicle Identification ......................................5-98Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-98Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-98

Electrical System ............................................5-98Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-98Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-99Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-99Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-99Floor Console Fuse Block ..............................5-99Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-101

Capacities and Specifications ........................5-104

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

ServiceFor service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added tothe vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things as airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems likeantilock brakes, traction control, and stability control.Some of these accessories could even causemalfunction or damage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Damage to vehicle components resulting from theinstallation or use of non-GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, are not covered under theterms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remainingwarranty coverage for affected parts.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuineGM Accessories. When you go to your GMdealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you willknow that GM-trained and supported service technicianswill perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-47.

5-3

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other reproductiveharm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, andsome component wear by-products contain and/or emitthese chemicals.

California Perchlorate MaterialsRequirementsCertain types of automotive applications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteriescontained in remote keyless transmitters, maycontain perchlorate materials. Special handling may benecessary. For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and the vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement parts, andtools before attempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, andother fasteners. English and metric fastenerscan be easily confused. If the wrong fastenersare used, parts can later break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If doing some of your own service work, use the properservice manual. It tells you much more about how toservice the vehicle than this manual can. To orderthe proper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-14.

5-4

This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting todo your own service work, see Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-46.Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileageand the date of any service work performed. SeeMaintenance Record on page 6-16.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofthe VehicleThings added to the outside of the vehicle can affect theairflow around it. This can cause wind noise and canaffect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipmentto the outside of the vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important part of theproper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep theengine clean and maintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octanerating of 91 or higher. You can also use regularunleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but thevehicle’s acceleration could be slightly reduced, andyou might notice a slight audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as spark knock. If the octane isless than 87, you might notice a heavy knockingnoise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.Otherwise, you could damage the engine. If you areusing gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hearheavy knocking, the engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolinescontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).We recommend against the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Additives on page 5-6 foradditional information.

5-5

California FuelIf the vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionsStandards, it is designed to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. See the underhoodemission control label. If this fuel is not availablein states adopting California emissions standards, thevehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control system performancemight be affected. The malfunction indicator lampcould turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog-checktest. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-29.If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that help preventengine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowingthe emission control system to work properly. Inmost cases, you should not have to add anything to thefuel. However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To helpkeep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if thevehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

For customers who do not use TOP TIER DetergentGasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engineoil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectorsand intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS isthe only gasoline additive recommended by GeneralMotors.

5-6

Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers andethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available inyour area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,if they comply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containingmore than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles thatwere not designed for those fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions can contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasolinewhether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend againstthe use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT canreduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of theemission control system could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,return to your dealer/retailer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

5-7

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire cancause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and follow all the instructions onthe pump island. Turn off the engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel orrefueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials awayfrom fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This is against the lawin some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fueldoor on the driver side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from thehook on the fuel door.

5-8

{CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel captoo quickly. If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. This spraycan happen if the tank is nearly full, and is morelikely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew thecap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill thetank and wait a few seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuelfrom painted surfaces as soon as possible. SeeWashing Your Vehicle on page 5-93.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until itclicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuelto evaporate into the atmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 3-29.

The vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC). TheCHECK GAS CAP message displays if the fuel capis not properly installed. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-37 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, do notremove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or by notifying the stationattendant. Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer/retailer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fitproperly. This may cause the malfunction indicatorlamp to light and may damage the fuel tank andemissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-29.

5-9

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in thevehicle. Static electricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuel vapor. You can bebadly burned and the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.• Do not fill a container while it is inside a

vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or onany surface other than the ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the insideof the fill opening before operating the nozzle.Contact should be maintained until the fillingis complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.• Do not use a cellular phone while

pumping fuel.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start up andinjure you even when the engine is not running.Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts andstart a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and otherfluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others couldbe burned. Be careful not to drop or spill thingsthat will burn onto a hot engine.

5-10

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Locate the interiorhood release lever. It islocated below theinstrument panel onthe driver’s side of thevehicle.

2. Pull down on the rearedge of the lever torelease the hood latch.

3. Go to the side of the vehicle and pull up on therear edge of the hood, near the windshield toopen the hood.

Notice: Closing the hood with the doors open maydamage the hood and/or doors. Always close thedoors before closing the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps areon properly. Then, pull the hood down and close it firmly.

5-11

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 2.4L L4 engine, this is what you will see:

5-12

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “AddingWasher Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-31.

B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 5-23.

C. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 5-32 and Hydraulic Clutchon page 5-23.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “CheckingEngine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-15.

E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-15.

G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power SteeringFluid on page 5-30.

H. Remote Negative (−) Ground (Out of View). SeeJump Starting on page 5-36.

I. Battery on page 5-35 (Out of View).J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on

page 5-36.K. Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-101.

5-13

When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 engine, this is what you will see:

5-14

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “AddingWasher Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-31.

B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 5-23.

C. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 5-32 and Hydraulic Clutchon page 5-23.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-15.

E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”

under Engine Oil on page 5-15.G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering

Fluid on page 5-30.H. Remote Negative (−) Ground (Out of View). See

Jump Starting on page 5-36.I. Battery on page 5-35 (Out of View).J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on

page 5-36.K. Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-101.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutesto drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel orcloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down and check the level.

5-15

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, add at leastone quart/liter of the recommended oil. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities and Specifications onpage 5-104.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above theupper mark that shows the proper operating range,the engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the properoperating range. Push the dipstick all the way back inwhen you are through.

2.4L L4 Engine 2.0L L4 Engine

5-16

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseFor Vehicles With the 2.0L L4 EngineLook for three things:

• GM4718MThis vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meetingGM Standard GM4718M, such as Mobil 1® orequivalent. Oils meeting this standard may beidentified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic oilswill meet this GM standard. Use only an oil thatmeets GM Standard GM4718M.

Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718MStandard designation can cause engine damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.• SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numberson an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburstsymbol

Oils meeting theserequirements should havethe starburst symbol onthe container. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with asynthetic oil meeting all requirements for this vehicle.Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintainengine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718Mmight not be available. You can add substitute oildesignated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at alltemperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM StandardGM4718M should not be used for an oil change.

5-17

For Vehicles With the 2.4L L4 EngineLook for three things:

• GM6094M

Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numberson an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting theserequirements should havethe starburst symbol onthe container. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and showing the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to use the recommendedoil can result in engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

5-18

Cold Temperature Operation

For Vehicles With the 2.4L L4 EngineIf in an area of extreme cold, where the temperaturefalls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provideeasier cold starting for the engine at extremely lowtemperatures. Always use an oil that meets the requiredspecification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of EngineOil to Use” for more information.

Engine Oil Additives / Engine OilFlushesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all that is needed forgood performance and engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are not recommended andcould cause engine damage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilThis vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System, a computersystem that indicates when to change the engine oiland filter. This is based on engine revolutions andengine temperature, and not on mileage. Based ondriving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. For the oil life systemto work properly, the system must be reset everytime the oil is changed.When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.A CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-37. Changethe oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the bestconditions, the oil life system might not indicate thatan oil change is necessary for over a year. However, theengine oil and filter must be changed at least once ayear and at this time the system must be reset.Your dealer/retailer has trained service people who willperform this work using genuine parts and reset thesystem. It is also important to check the oil regularly andkeep it at the proper level.If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must bechanged at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oilchange. Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed.

5-19

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when to changeyour engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it cancalculate when the next oil change is required. If asituation occurs where the oil is changed prior toa CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on, resetthe system.

After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.

2. Press the information and reset buttons on theDriver Information Center (DIC) at the sametime to enter the personalization menu. See DICVehicle Personalization on page 3-41.

3. Press the information button to scroll through theavailable personalization menu modes until theDIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.

4. Press and hold the reset button until the DICdisplay shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This will tell youthe system has been reset.

5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back onwhen the vehicle is started, the engine oil life systemhas not reset. Repeat the reset procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that can beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to aplace that collects used oil.

5-20

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter element at each scheduledMaintenance II service interval and replace the aircleaner/filter element at the first oil change after50,000 miles (80 000 km). If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

2.4L L4 Engine

2.0L L4 Engine

5-21

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from thevehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loosedust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a newfilter is required.

To inspect or replace the filter, open the clamps thathold the cover on and lift off the cover. Be sure toreinstall the cover tightly.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter offcan cause you or others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stopflames if the engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be careful working on theengine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt caneasily get into the engine, which will damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when youare driving.

Automatic Transmission FluidIt is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluidloss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to adealer/retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inthe Maintenance Schedule. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4. Be sure to use the transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-12.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmissionfluid may damage the vehicle, and the damagesmay not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.Always use the automatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-12.

5-22

Manual Transmission FluidIt is not necessary to check the manual transmissionfluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to adealer/retailer for service. Have it repaired as soon aspossible. You may also have the fluid level checkedby your dealer/retailer when the oil is changed.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12for the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle isself-adjusting. This system does not have its ownreservoir. It receives fluid from the brake master cylinderreservoir.

See Brakes on page 5-32 for more information.

Cooling SystemThe Cooling System allows the engine to maintain thecorrect working temperature.

A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap

2.4 L4 Engine

5-23

A. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure CapB. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood canstart up even when the engine is not running andcan cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, youcan be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you runthe engine, it could lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and you could be burned.Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® cancause premature engine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant couldrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

2.0L L4 Engine

5-24

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designedto remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.

The following explains the cooling system and how tocheck and add coolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 5-29.

What to Use

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to the cooling system canbe dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquidsuch as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolantmixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning systemis set for the proper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, the engine could gettoo hot but you would not get the overheatwarning. The engine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing elseneeds to be added. This mixture:

• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),outside temperature.

• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),engine temperature.

• Protects against rust and corrosion.

• Will not damage aluminum parts.

• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.

Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, theengine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Too much water in the mixture canfreeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core,and other parts.

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are usedin the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle couldbe damaged. Use only the proper mixture ofthe engine coolant listed in this manual for thecooling system. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

5-25

Checking CoolantThe vehicle must be on a level surface when checkingthe coolant level.

The coolant surge tank is located in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for moreinformation on location.

Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surgetank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. Ifcoolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or abovethe FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,

drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done. See Engine Coolant Engine Coolantfor more information.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When yourengine is cold, the coolant level should be at the COLDFILL line.

Do not overfill the surge tank. Too much coolant canresult in an overflow condition when the fluid is hot.

How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol andit will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Donot spill coolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedure couldcause the engine to overheat and be severelydamaged.

5-26

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood canstart up even when the engine is not running andcan cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turn the surge tankpressure cap — even a little — they can come outat high speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank.

1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap whenthe cooling system, including the coolant surge tankpressure cap and upper radiator hose, is nolonger hot. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about two or two and one-halfturns. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. Thiswill allow any pressure still left to be vented outthe discharge hose.

2. Then keep turning thepressure cap slowly,and remove it.

5-27

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,to the COLD FILL line. Wait about five minutes,then check to see if the level is below the COLDFILL line. If the level is below the line, add additionalcoolant to bring the level up to the line. Repeatthis procedure until the level remains constant at theCOLD FILL line for at least five minutes.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, startthe engine and let it run until you can feel the upperradiator hose getting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside the coolantsurge tank may be lower. If the level is lower thanthe COLD FILL line, add more of the proper mixtureto the coolant surge tank until the level reachesthe COLD FILL line.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,coolant loss and possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.

See your dealer/retailer, if necessary.

5-28

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warn of engineoverheating.

There is an engine coolant temperature warning light onyour vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light on page 3-28 for moreinformation.

You may decide not to lift the hood when this warningappears, but instead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.

If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicleis parked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the engine cooling fan is running. Ifthe engine is overheating, the fan should be running.If not, do not continue to run the engine and havethe vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage from running the enginewithout coolant is not covered by the warranty.

Notice: If the engine catches fire because of beingdriven with no coolant, your vehicle can be badlydamaged. The costly repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

If Steam Is Coming From The EngineCompartment

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burn youbadly, even if you just open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hear steam comingfrom it. Just turn it off and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there isno sign of steam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You orothers could be badly burned. Stop your engine ifit overheats, and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.

5-29

If No Steam Is Coming From TheEngine CompartmentIf an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steamcan be seen or heard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hotwhen the vehicle:

• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

• Stops after high-speed driving.

• Idles for long periods in traffic.

If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign ofsteam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature andto the highest fan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and letthe engine idle.

If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in theoverheat zone or an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drivethe vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the car in front of you. If thewarning does not come back on, continue to drivenormally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park thevehicle right away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for threeminutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed,turn off the engine until it cools down.

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forreservoir location.

5-30

When to Check Power Steering FluidThe power steering fluid does not need to be checkedregularly, unless there is a suspected leak or an unusualnoise. If there is fluid loss, have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the engine off and let it cool down.

2. Clean the top and cap of the reservoir.

3. Remove the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten.

5. Remove the cap again and check the fluid level onthe dipstick.

The level should be between the COLD and HOTmarks. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring thelevel up to the COLD mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.Always use the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage thevehicle and the damages may not be covered bythe vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you willbe operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing.

5-31

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it. Addwasher fluid until thetank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for reservoirlocation.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, followthe manufacturer’s instructions for addingwater.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water does notclean as well as washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’swindshield washer system and paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinderreservoir is filled withDOT-3 brake fluid. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forthe location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level inthe reservoir might go down:

• The brake fluid level goes down because of normalbrake lining wear. When new linings are installed,the fluid level goes back up.

• A fluid leak in the brake and/or clutch hydraulicsystem can also cause a low fluid level. Havethe brake and/or clutch hydraulic system fixed, sincea leak means that sooner or later the brakesand/or clutch will not work well.

5-32

Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid. Adding fluid doesnot correct a leak. If fluid is added when the brakelinings are worn, there will be too much fluid when newbrake linings are installed. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on the brake/clutchhydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on theengine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, and the vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake and/or clutch hydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brakewarning light comes on. See Brake System WarningLight on page 3-25.

What to AddUse only new DOT-3 brake fluid from a sealedcontainer. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-12.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it. This helps keepdirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake or clutchhydraulic system, the brakes or clutch might notwork well. This could cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brakeor clutch hydraulic system parts. For example,just a few drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake or clutch hydraulicsystem can damage brake or clutch hydraulicsystem parts so badly that they will haveto be replaced. Do not let someone put in thewrong kind of fluid.

• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.If you do, wash it off immediately. See WashingYour Vehicle on page 5-93.

5-33

Brake WearThis vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads havebuilt-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warningsound when the brake pads are worn and new padsare needed. The sound can come and go or be heard allthe time the vehicle is moving, except when applyingthe brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means that soonthe brakes will not work well. That could lead to anaccident. When the brake wear warning sound isheard, have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to torque specifications inCapacities and Specifications on page 5-104.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does notreturn to normal height, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake servicemight be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time the brakes are applied, with or without thevehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehiclewas designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.When parts of the braking system are replaced — forexample, when the brake linings wear down and newones are installed — be sure to get new approvedreplacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example, if someone puts in brakelinings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balancebetween the front and rear brakes can change — for theworse. The braking performance expected can change inmany other ways if the wrong replacement brake partsare installed.

5-34

BatteryThis vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it istime for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer forone that has the replacement number shown on theoriginal battery’s label. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 for battery location.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.

Vehicle Storage

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas thatcan explode. You can be badly hurt if you are notcareful. See Jump Starting on page 5-36 for tipson working around a battery without getting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.This helps keep the battery from running down.

Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery oruse a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain thecharge of the battery over an extended period of time.

5-35

Jump StartingIf the vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want touse another vehicle and some jumper cables to start thevehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, some orall of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to the vehicle that would not be coveredby the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damage the vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. You would not be ableto start the vehicle, and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, setthe parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved inthe jump start procedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or a manual transmissionin N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessorieson during the jump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairs would not becovered by the warranty. Always turn off the radioand other accessories when jump starting thevehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn offthe radio and all lamps that are not needed. Thiswill avoid sparks and help save both batteries. Andit could save the radio!

5-36

4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations onthat vehicle.You will not need to access your battery for jumpstarting. The vehicle has a remote positive (+) and aremote negative (−) jump starting terminal.

Locate the remotepositive (+) terminal whichis located under a redplastic cover on the enginecompartment fuse block.Open the red plastic coverto access the terminal.

Do not remove fuse block cover to jump start thevehicle.

Locate the remotenegative (−) groundbracket which is located inthe rear of the enginecompartment, on thepassenger side of thevehicle, and ismarked GND (−).

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12for more information on the location of thepositive (+) and negative (−) terminals on thevehicle.

5-37

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight ifyou need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You do notneed to add water to the battery installed in yournew vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, besure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If you don’t,explosive gas could be present.



Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Donot get it on you. If you accidentally get it in youreyes or on your skin, flush the place with waterand get medical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure youbadly. Keep your hands away from moving partsonce the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.

5-38

Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or youwill get a short that would damage the batteryand maybe other parts too. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal onthe dead battery because this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal location on the vehicle with the deadbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−) cabledoes not go to the dead battery. It goes to aheavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle withthe dead battery. Your vehicle has a remotenegative (−) ground bracket for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. Ifit will not start after a few tries, it probably needsservice.

5-39

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shorting mayoccur and damage the vehicle. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always connectand remove the jumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that the cables do not toucheach other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or RemoteNegative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the othervehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to its originalposition.

Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.

Jumper Cable Removal

5-40

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on alevel surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add somelubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the filler plug hole.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-12.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset at the factory andshould need no further adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, theheadlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to thelow-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncomingdrivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it isrecommended that you take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer for service.

5-41

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 5-45.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside andcan burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sure to read and followthe instructions on the bulb package.

HeadlampsTo replace the low/high-beam/Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) headlamp bulb:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull itfrom the headlamp assembly.

3. Holding the base of the socket, pull the old bulbfrom the bulb socket.

4. Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket untilit connects.

5. Push the bulb socket into the headlamp assemblyand turn it clockwise to lock it into place.

5-42

Front Turn Signal, Parking andFog Lamps

A. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp

B. Fog Lamp (If Equipped)

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11.

2. Locate the bulb assembly under the front bumper.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pullout the bulb assembly.

4. Disconnect the bulb socket from the wiring harness.

5. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket.


7. Reconnect the bulb socket to the wiring harness.

8. Push the bulb socket straight into the bulb assemblyand turn it clockwise to lock it into place.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplamps (Base Level)To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-8.

2. From inside the vehicle, remove the two screwsfrom the taillamp assembly.

3. Remove the taillamp assembly.

5-43

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull itstraight out of the taillamp assembly.



7. Push the bulb socket straight into the taillampassembly and turn it clockwise to lock it intoplace.

8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly and the two screwsthat holds the taillamp assembly from inside thevehicle.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplamps (Removable Hardtop)If your vehicle has a removable hardtop, see yourdealer/retailer to replace these bulbs.

Back-Up Lamps

The back-up lamps arelocated in the rear bumper.

To replace a bulb:

1. Locate the bulb socket under and behind the rearbumper.

2. Turn it counterclockwise and pull it straight out ofthe lamp assembly.



5. Reinstall the bulb socket by lining up the tabs in thelamp assembly and turn it clockwise to secure it.

5-44

License Plate LampTo replace the license plate lamp bulb:

1. Remove the license plate assembly by turning thetwo screws counterclockwise.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

4. Push the new bulb in and turn it clockwise to install.

5. Replace the license plate lamp by pushing itthrough the fascia opening.

6. Turn the two screws that hold the license platelamp clockwise to reinstall.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb NumberBack-Up Lamps 3047Fog Lamp 898*Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamp 3757NAKFront Sidemarker Lamp 194Headlamps, High/Low-Beam/Daytime Running Lights H13

License Plate Lamp 168Stoplamp, Taillamp and TurnSignal Lamp 3157K

* Uplevel Model

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact yourdealer/retailer.

5-45

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected for wearand cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types and areremoved in different ways. For proper type and length,see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-14.

To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the hookand push the wiper arm (A) out of the blade (C).

3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiperarm until you hear the release lever click intoplace.

5-46

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your vehicle Warrantybooklet for details. For additional information referto the tire manufacturer.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tiresare dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch flexing. You could have an air-outand a serious accident. See Loading theVehicle on page 4-20.



• Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressure should bechecked when your vehicle’s tires arecold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-53.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit a pothole.Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If thetire’s tread is badly worn, or if yourvehicle’s tires have been damaged,replace them.

5-47

Low-Profile TiresIf your vehicle has P245/45R18 size tires, they areclassified as low-profile tires. These tires aredesigned for very responsive driving on wet or drypavement. You may also notice more roadnoise with low-profile performance tires and thatthey tend to wear faster.

Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires,they are more susceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damagecan occur when coming into contact with roadhazards like, potholes, or sharp edgedobjects, or when sliding into a curb. Thevehicle warranty does not cover this type ofdamage. Keep tires set to the correct inflationpressure and, when possible avoid contactwith curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.

Winter TiresIf your vehicle has P245/45R18 size tires, they areclassified as low-profile performance tires. These tiresare designed for very responsive driving on wet ordry pavement. If you expect to drive on snow orice covered roads often, you may want to get winter

tires for your vehicle. The low-profile performance tiresmay not offer the traction you would like or the samelevel of performance as winter tires on snow or icecovered roads.

Winter tires, in general, are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice covered roads. With wintertires, there may be decreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shorter tire tread life. Afterswitching to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection. Also, see BuyingNew Tires on page 5-63.

If you choose to use winter tires:

• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on allfour wheel positions.

• Use only radial ply tires of the same size,load range, and speed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as your originalequipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires witha lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximumspeed capability.

5-48

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The example below shows a typicalpassenger (p-metric) tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 5-65.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

5-49

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character in the tire size meansa passenger vehicle tire engineered to standardsset by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as

shown in item C of the illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as itis wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside thetire pressing outward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

5-50

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-53.

Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle withstandard and optional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading the Vehicle on page 4-20.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number rangingfrom 1 to 279 that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

5-51

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. Themaximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-20.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53 and Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-20.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laidat 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximum speed at which atire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 5-62.

5-52

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 5-65.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-20.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-20.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Premature or irregular wear• Poor handling• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear• Poor handling• Rough ride• Needless damage from road hazards

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to your vehicle. This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when they

5-53

are cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading the Vehicle on page 4-20. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommended

pressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radioand sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. TheTPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in yourvehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should bechecked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehicle manufactureron the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressurelabel, you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

5-54

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when oneor more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handlingand stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for propertire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicatoris combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunctionexists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur fora variety of reasons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehiclethat prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-56for additional information.

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and ScienceCanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates ona radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



5-55

The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complieswith RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:




Tire Pressure Monitor OperationThis vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driverwhen a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensorsare mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly. TheTPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’stires and transmits the tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressurecondition is detected, theTPMS illuminates thelow tire pressure warninglight located on theinstrument panel cluster.

At the same time a message to check the pressure in aspecific tire appears on the Driver Information Center(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning lightand the DIC warning message come on at each ignitioncycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels canbe viewed by the driver. For additional information anddetails about the DIC operation and displays seeDIC Operation and Displays on page 3-35 and DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-37.

The low tire pressure warning light may come on in coolweather when the vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. This could be an earlyindicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.

5-56

A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to yourvehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s originalequipment tires and the correct inflation pressure foryour vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading theVehicle on page 4-20, for an example of the Tire andLoading Information label and its location on yourvehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53.

Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about alow tire pressure condition but it does not replace normaltire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-60 and Tires on page 5-47.

Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants coulddamage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by usingan incorrect tire sealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved tiresealant available through your dealer/retailer.

Your vehicle, when new, included a factory-installed TireInflator Kit. This kit uses a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tire sealants could damagethe TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit (Without Selector Switch) on page 5-71 or TireSealant and Compressor Kit (With Selector Switch) onpage 5-80 for information regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light and MessageThe TPMS will not function properly if one or more of theTPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the low tire warning lightflashes for about one minute and then stays on forthe remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage is also displayed. The low tire warning lightand DIC warning message come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected. Some of theconditions that can cause the malfunction light and DICmessage to come on are:

• The TPMS sensor matching process was startedbut not completed or not completed successfullyafter rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC messageand TPMS malfunction light should go off oncethe TPMS sensor matching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”later in this section.

• One or more TPMS sensors are missing ordamaged. The DIC message and the TPMSmalfunction light should go off when the TPMSsensors are installed and the sensor matchingprocess is performed successfully. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

5-57

• Replacement tires or wheels do not match yourvehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.Tires and wheels other than those recommendedfor your vehicle could prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See Buying New Tires onpage 5-63.

• Operating electronic devices or being near facilitiesusing radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMScould cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signala low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer forservice if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC messagecomes on and stays on.

TPMS Sensor Matching ProcessEach TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensorsor rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codesneed to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. Thesensors are matched, to the tire/wheel positions, inthe following order: driver side front tire, passenger sidefront tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver siderear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’sair pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, donot exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on

the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s air-pressureuse the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-styleair pressure gage, or a key.

You have two minutes to match each tire and wheelposition. If it takes longer than two minutes to match anytire and wheel position, the matching process stopsand you need to start over.

TPMS Matching Process for Vehicleswith Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with theengine off.

3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter’s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, at thesame time, for about five seconds to start the TPMSlearn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating theTPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode.

4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver sidefront turn signal also comes on to indicate thatcorner’s sensor is ready to be learned.

5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem.Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire’s air pressure for abouteight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then all

5-58

the turn signals flash one time to confirm the sensoridentification code has been matched to thetire/wheel position.

6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on toindicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.Proceed to the passenger side front tire andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on toindicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.Proceed to the passenger side rear tire andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on toindicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeatthe procedure in Step 5.

9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driverside rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound toindicate the tire learning process is done. Turnthe ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learnmode, or if communication with the receiverstops, or if the time limit has expired, turn theignition switch to LOCK/OFF and start overbeginning with Step 2.

10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

TPMS Matching Process for Vehicleswithout Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with theengine off.

3. Using the Driver Information Center (DIC), pressthe INFO and Set/Reset buttons at the same timefor about one second. Then press and releasethe INFO button until the TIRE LEARN? messagedisplays.

4. Press and hold the Set/Reset DIC button forapproximately three seconds to start the TPMSlearn mode. The horn sounds twice to indicate theTPMS receiver is ready and the TIRE LEARNON message displays. The driver side front turnsignal also comes on to indicate that corner sensoris ready to be learned.

5. Start with the driver side front tire.

5-59

6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem.Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire’s air pressure for abouteight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then allthe turn signals flash one time to confirm thesensor identification code has been matched to thetire/wheel position.

7. The passenger side front turn signal comes on toindicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.Proceed to the passenger side front tire andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on toindicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.Proceed to the passenger side rear tire andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. The driver side rear turn signal comes on toindicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeatthe procedure in Step 6.

10. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driverside rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound toindicate the tire learning process is done. TheLEARN COMPLETE message displays if all fourtire positions are learned. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learnmode, or if communication with the receiverstops, or if the time limit has expired, the TIRELEARN? message displays on the DIC. Turn theignition switch to LOCK/OFF and start overbeginning with Step 2.

11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

Tire Inspection and RotationWe recommend that you regularly inspect yourvehicle’s tires for signs of wear or damage.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-62for more information.

Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4.

The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achievea uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thiswill ensure that your vehicle continues to performmost like it did when the tires were new.

5-60

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tiresas soon as possible and check wheel alignment.Also check for damaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-62 andWheel Replacement on page 5-67.

When rotating Goodyear Eagle RSA P245/45R18non-directional tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

If your vehicle has Goodyear Eagle F1-GS2P245/45R18 size tires, they are directional tiresand must roll in a certain direction for thebest overall performance. The direction is shownby an arrow on the tire sidewall. Becausethese tires are directional, they should be rotatedas shown here. These tires should only bemoved from front to rear and rear to front on thesame side of the vehicle.

Non-Directional Tires

Directional Tires

5-61

After the tires have been rotated, adjust thefront and rear inflation pressures as shown onthe Tire and Loading Information label. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53 and Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-20.

Reset the Tire Pressure monitor System. See TirePressure Monitor Operation on page 5-56.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 5-104.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause a crash. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use acloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brush later, if youneed to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

When It Is Time for New TiresVarious factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditionsinfluence when you need new tires.

One way to tell when it istime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

5-62

You need new tires if any of the following statementsare true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more placesaround the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through thetire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage thatcannot be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they arenot being used. This is also true for the spare tire, ifyour vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fastthis aging takes place, including temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. Withproper care and maintenance tires will typically wear outbefore they degrade due to age. If you are unsureabout the need to replace your tires as they get older,consult the tire manufacturer for more information.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires for yourvehicle. The original equipment tires installed onyour vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meetGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacementtires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed to give thesame performance and vehicle safety, during normaluse, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over adozen critical specifications that impact the overallperformance of your vehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling, traction control, and tirepressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tiresize. If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS, for mudand snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-49for additional information.

5-63

GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This isbecause uniform tread depth on all tires will helpkeep your vehicle performing most like it did when thetires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires canaffect the braking and handling performance of yourvehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-60for information on proper tire rotation.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose controlwhile driving. If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types (radial and bias-beltedtires) the vehicle may not handle properly,and you could have a crash. Using tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types may alsocause damage to your vehicle. Be sure touse the correct size, brand, and type of tireson your vehicle’s wheels.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, thewheel rim flanges could develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tire and/or wheelcould fail suddenly, causing a crash. Useonly radial-ply tires with the wheels on thevehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those thatdo not have a TPC Spec number, make sure theyare the same size, load range, speed rating, andconstruction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as yourvehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccurate low-pressure warning ifnon-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressurewarning that is higher or lower than the proper warninglevel you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-54.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on theTire and Loading Information label. See Loading theVehicle on page 4-20, for more information aboutthe Tire and Loading Information label and its locationon your vehicle.

5-64

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different size thanyour original equipment wheels and tires, this mayaffect the way your vehicle performs, including itsbraking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, andresistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehiclehas electronic systems such as, antilock brakes, tractioncontrol, and electronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle maynot provide an acceptable level of performanceand safety if tires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. You may increase thechance that you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel and tiresystems developed for your vehicle, and havethem properly installed by a GM certifiedtechnician.

See Buying New Tires on page 5-63 and Accessoriesand Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

5-65

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

{WARNING:

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

5-66

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

{WARNING:

The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give you thelongest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing willnot be necessary on a regular basis. However, ifyou notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling toone side or the other, the alignment might need tobe checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating whendriving on a smooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheelyou need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mountedthe same way as the one it replaces.

5-67

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts, replace them only with new GMoriginal equipment parts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. Itcould affect the braking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured. Always use thecorrect wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance tothe body and chassis.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause a crash. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use acloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brush later, if youneed to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

5-68

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or the threads ofthe wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel nuts mightcome loose and the wheel could fall off, causinga crash.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheelnuts can cause the wheel to become loose andeven come off. This could lead to a crash. Be sureto use the correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GM originalequipment wheel nuts.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can leadto brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.You cannot know how it has been used or how farit has been driven. It could fail suddenly andcause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, usea new GM original equipment wheel.

5-69

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle withoutthe proper amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension, or othervehicle parts. The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to lose control of thevehicle and you or others may be injured in acrash. Use another type of traction device only ifits manufacturer recommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combination and roadconditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly,re-adjust or remove the device if it is contactingthe vehicle, and do not spin the wheels. If you dofind traction devices that will fit, install them on therear tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatYour vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit. SeeTire Sealant and Compressor Kit (Without SelectorSwitch) on page 5-71 or Tire Sealant and CompressorKit (With Selector Switch) on page 5-80. There isno spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and no placeto store a tire.

It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. SeeTires on page 5-47. If air goes out of a tire, it is muchmore likely to leak out slowly. But, if you shouldever have a blow out, here are a few tips about what toexpect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much likea skid and may require the same correction youwould use in a skid. In any rear blow out, remove yourfoot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the way you want the vehicleto go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you canstill steer. Gently brake to a stop, well off the roadif possible.

5-70

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place and stopping. Thendo this:

1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 3-5.

2. Park your vehicle. If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brake firmly and putthe shift lever in P (Park). See Shifting IntoPark (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-24. Ifyour vehicle has a manual transmission, move theshift lever to R (Reverse) and set the parkingbrake firmly. See Parking the Vehicle (ManualTransmission) on page 2-26 for additionalinformation.

3. Turn off the engine.

4. Inspect the flat tire.

If the tire has been separated from the wheel, hasdamaged sidewalls, or has a puncture larger than a1⁄4 inch (6 mm), the tire is too severely damaged for thetire sealant and compressor kit to be effective. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.

If the tire has a puncture less than a 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) inthe tread area of the tire, see Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit (Without Selector Switch) on page 5-71or Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit (With SelectorSwitch) on page 5-80.

Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit(Without Selector Switch)

System Identification

If the vehicle has the tire sealant and compressor kitshown above, see the operating instructions that follow.

5-71

If the vehicle has the tire sealant and compressor kitshown above, follow the operating instructionsunder “Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit (With SelectorSwitch).”

{CAUTION:


{CAUTION:

Over-inflating a tire could cause the tire to ruptureand you or others could be injured. Be sure toread and follow the tire sealant and compressor kitinstructions and inflate the tire to its recommendedpressure. Do not exceed the recommendedpressure.

5-72

{CAUTION:

Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit orother equipment in the passenger compartment ofthe vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment could strike someone.Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit,there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may not be a place tostore a tire.

The tire sealant and compressor can be used totemporarily seal punctures up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in thetread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflatean under inflated tire.

If the tire has been separated from the wheel, hasdamaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tire sealant andcompressor kit to be effective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-6.

Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressorkit instructions.

The kit includes:

A. Air CompressorB. Tire Sealant

CanisterC. Power PlugD. On/Off Button

E. Pressure GageF. Air Only Hose

(Black)G. Sealant/Air Hose

(Clear)

5-73

Tire SealantRead and follow the safe handling instructions on thelabel adhered to the sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealantcanister. The sealant canister should be replaced beforeits expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal andInstallation of the Sealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. Afterusage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See “Removal andInstallation of the Sealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant and CompressorKit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

When using the tire sealant and compressor kit duringcold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environmentfor 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster.

5-74

Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 5-70. Do not remove any objects that havepenetrated the tire.1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its

storage location. See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit Storage on page 5-89.Make sure the on/off button (D) is in the off (O)position.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and thepower plug (C).

3. Place the kit on the ground.Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close tothe ground so the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire byturning it counterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valvestem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (C) into the accessory poweroutlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from otheraccessory power outlets. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 3-14.If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do notuse the cigarette lighter.If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use thecigarette lighter.Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door orwindow.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running whileusing the air compressor.

8. Press the on/off (D) button to turn the tire sealantand compressor kit on.The compressor will inject sealant and air intothe tire.The pressure gage (E) will initially show a highpressure while the compressor pushes the sealantinto the tire. Once the sealant is completelydispersed into the tire, the pressure will quicklydrop and start to rise again as the tire inflates withair only.

5-75

9. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflationpressure using the pressure gage (E). Therecommended inflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and Loading Information label. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53.The pressure gage (E) may read higher than theactual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turnthe compressor off to get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor may be turned on/off untilthe correct pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot bereached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicleshould not be driven farther. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate the tire. Remove thepower plug from the accessory power outletand unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.

10. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealantand compressor kit off.The tire is not sealed and will continue toleak air until the vehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire, therefore,Steps 11 through 17 must be done immediatelyafter Step 10.Be careful while handling the tire sealant andcompressor kit as it could be warm after usage.

11. Unplug the power plug (C) from the accessorypower outlet in the vehicle.

12. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) counterclockwise toremove it from the tire valve stem.

13. Replace the tire valve stem cap.

14. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the powerplug (C) back in their original location.

15. If the flat tire was ableto inflate to therecommended inflationpressure, removethe maximum speedlabel from the sealantcanister (B) andplace it in a highlyvisible location.

The label is a reminder not to exceed 55 mph(90 km/h) until the damaged tire is repairedor replaced.

16. Return the equipment to its original storage locationin the vehicle.

17. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) todistribute the sealant in the tire.

5-76

18. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “Using the TireSealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant toInflate a Tire (Not Punctured).”If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi(68 kPa) below the recommended inflation pressure,stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.If the tire pressure has not dropped more than10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflationpressure, inflate the tire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

19. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire or vehicle.

20. Dispose of the used sealant canister (B) andsealant/air hose (F) assembly at a localdealer/retailer or in accordance with local statecodes and practices.

21. Replace it with a new canister available from yourdealer/retailer.

22. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealantand compressor kit, take the vehicle to anauthorized dealer/retailer within a 100 miles(161 km) of driving to have the tire repaired orreplaced.

Using the Tire Sealant and CompressorKit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured)To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air onlyand not sealant:

Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 5-70.

1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from itsstorage location. See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit Storage on page 5-89.

5-77

2. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the sealantcanister (B) by pulling up on the lever.

3. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealantcanister (B).

4. Remove the power plug (C) from the aircompressor (A).

5. Place the kit on the ground.Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close tothe ground so the hose will reach it.

6. Remove the tire valve stem cap by turning itcounterclockwise.

7. Attach the air only hose (F) onto the tire valve stemand press the lever down to secure it.

8. Plug the power plug (C) into the accessory poweroutlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from otheraccessory power outlets. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 3-14.If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do notuse the cigarette lighter.If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use thecigarette lighter.Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door orwindow.


10. Press the on/off (D) button to turn thecompressor on.The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.

11. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflationpressure using the pressure gage (E). Therecommended inflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and Loading Information label. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53.The pressure gage (E) may read higher than theactual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turnthe compressor off to get an accurate reading.The compressor may be turned on/off untilthe correct pressure is reached.

12. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealantand compressor kit off.Be careful while handling the tire sealant andcompressor kit as it could be warm after usage.

13. Unplug the power plug (C) from the accessorypower outlet in the vehicle.

14. Disconnect the air only hose (F) from the tire valvestem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.

15. Replace the air only hose (F) and the powerplug (C) back in its original location.

16. Place the equipment in the original storage locationin the vehicle.

5-78

Removal and Installation of the SealantCanisterTo remove the sealant canister:

1. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the sealantcanister (B) by pulling up on the lever.

2. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealantcanister (B).

3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) from thecompressor (A).

4. Turn the sealant canister (B) so the inflator fillinghose is aligned with the slot in the compressor.

5. Lift the sealant canister (B) from the compressorand replace with a new sealant canister. See yourdealer/retailer for more information.

5-79

To install a new sealant canister:

1. Align the sealant/air hose (F) with the slot in the aircompressor.

2. Push the sealant canister (B) down and turn itclockwise.

3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (F) around the aircompressor channel to stow it in its original location.

4. Push the air compressor inflator hose (F) onto thesealant canister inlet and push the lever down.

Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit(With Selector Switch)

System Identification

If the vehicle has the tire sealant and compressor kitshown above, see the operating instructions that follow.

5-80

If the vehicle has the tire sealant and compressor kitshown above, follow the operating instructionsunder “Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit (WithoutSelector Switch).”

{CAUTION:


{CAUTION:

Over-inflating a tire could cause the tire to ruptureand you or others could be injured. Be sure toread and follow the tire sealant and compressor kitinstructions and inflate the tire to its recommendedpressure. Do not exceed the recommendedpressure.

5-81

{CAUTION:

Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit orother equipment in the passenger compartment ofthe vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment could strike someone.Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit,there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may not be a place tostore a tire.

The tire sealant and compressor can be used totemporarily seal punctures up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in thetread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflatean under inflated tire.

If the tire has been separated from the wheel, hasdamaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tire sealant andcompressor kit to be effective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-6.

Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressorkit instructions.

The kit includes:

A. Selector Switch(Sealant/Air orAir Only)

B. On/Off ButtonC. Pressure GageD. Pressure Deflation

Button

E. Tire SealantCanister

F. Sealant/Air Hose(Clear)

G. Air Only Hose(Black)

H. Power Plug

5-82

Tire SealantRead and follow the safe handling instructions on thelabel adhered to the sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealantcanister. The sealant canister should be replaced beforeits expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal andInstallation of the Sealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. Afterusage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See “Removal andInstallation of the Sealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant and CompressorKit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate aPunctured TireFollow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant and compressor kit duringcold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environmentfor 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster.

5-83

Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 5-70. Do not remove any objects that havepenetrated the tire.


2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and thepower plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire byturning it counterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valvestem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into the accessory poweroutlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from otheraccessory power outlets. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 3-14.If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do notuse the cigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use thecigarette lighter.Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door orwindow.


8. Turn the selector switch (A) counterclockwise to theSealant + Air position.

9. Press the on/off (B) button to turn the tire sealantand compressor kit on.The compressor will inject sealant and air intothe tire.The pressure gage (C) will initially show a highpressure while the compressor pushes the sealantinto the tire. Once the sealant is completelydispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly dropand start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only.

5-84

10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflationpressure using the pressure gage (C). Therecommended inflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and Loading Information label. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53.The pressure gage (C) may read higher than theactual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turnthe compressor off to get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor may be turned on/off untilthe correct pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot bereached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicleshould not be driven farther. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate the tire. Remove thepower plug from the accessory power outletand unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.

11. Press the on/off button (B) to turn the tire sealantand compressor kit off.The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak airuntil the vehicle is driven and the sealant isdistributed in the tire, therefore, Steps 12 through18 must be done immediately after Step 11.Be careful while handling the tire sealant andcompressor kit as it could be warm after usage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) from the accessorypower outlet in the vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) counterclockwise toremove it from the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valve stem cap.

15. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the powerplug (H) back in their original location.

16. If the flat tire was ableto inflate to therecommended inflationpressure, removethe maximum speedlabel from the sealantcanister (E) andplace it in a highlyvisible location.

The label is a reminder not to exceed 55 mph(90 km/h) until the damaged tire is repairedor replaced.

17. Return the equipment to its original storage locationin the vehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) todistribute the sealant in the tire.

5-85

19. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “Using the TireSealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant toInflate a Tire (Not Punctured).”If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi(68 kPa) below the recommended inflation pressure,stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.If the tire pressure has not dropped more than10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflationpressure, inflate the tire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, andvehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealant canister (E) andsealant/air hose (F) assembly at a localdealer/retailer or in accordance with local statecodes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canister available from yourdealer/retailer.

23. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealantand compressor kit, take the vehicle to anauthorized dealer/retailer within a 100 miles(161 km) of driving to have the tire repaired orreplaced.

Using the Tire Sealant and CompressorKit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured)To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air onlyand not sealant:

Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 5-70.


5-86

2. Unwrap the air only hose (G) and thepower plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

4. Remove the tire valve stem cap from the flat tire byturning it counterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto the tire valve stemby turning it clockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into the accessory poweroutlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from otheraccessory power outlets. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 3-14.If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do notuse the cigarette lighter.If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use thecigarette lighter.Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door orwindow.


8. Turn the selector switch (A) clockwise to the AirOnly position.

9. Press the on/off (B) button to turn thecompressor on.The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflationpressure using the pressure gage (C). Therecommended inflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and Loading Information label. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53.The pressure gage (C) may read higher than theactual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turnthe compressor off to get an accurate reading.The compressor may be turned on/off untilthe correct pressure is reached.If you inflate the tire higher than the recommendedpressure you can adjust the excess pressure bypressing the pressure deflation button (D) until theproper pressure reading is reached. This optionis only functional when using the air only hose (G).

11. Press the on/off button (B) to turn the tire sealantand compressor kit off.Be careful while handling the tire sealant andcompressor kit as it could be warm after usage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) from the accessorypower outlet in the vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air only hose (G) from the tire valvestem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.

14. Replace the air only hose (G) and the powerplug (H) and cord back in its original location.

5-87

15. Place the equipment in the original storage locationin the vehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kit has an accessoryadapter located in a compartment on the bottom ofits housing that may be used to inflate air mattresses,balls, etc.

Removal and Installation of the SealantCanisterTo remove the sealant canister:

1. Unwrap the sealant hose.

2. Press the canisterrelease button.

3. Pull up and remove the canister.

4. Replace with a new canister which is available fromyour dealer/retailer.

5. Push the new canister into place.

5-88

Tire Sealant and Compressor KitStorage

ConvertibleThe tire sealant and compressor kit is located in thedriver side rear corner of the trunk.

1. Make sure the convertible top is in the upposition before accessing the tire sealant andcompressor kit.

2. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-8.

3. Squeeze the two tabs of the quick release buckle toremove the tire sealant and compressor kit.

4. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from itscontainer.

To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reversethe steps.

5-89

Coupe1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-8.

2. Remove the rear storage compartment cover bypulling up on the handle.

3. Squeeze the two tabs of the quick release buckle toremove the tire sealant and compressor kit.

4. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from itscontainer.

To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reversethe steps.

Appearance Care

Interior CleaningThe vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it iscleaned often. Although not always visible, dust anddirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damagecarpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regularvacuuming is recommended to remove particles from theupholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery frombecoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should beremoved as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interiormay experience extremes of heat that could causestains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers and garmentsthat transfer color to home furnishings may alsotransfer color to the vehicle’s interior.

When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleanersspecifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.Permanent damage may result from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were not intended. Use glasscleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-sprayfrom other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

5-90

Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaningglass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratchthe glass and/or cause damage to the rear windowdefogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Beforeusing cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’sdoors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobsusing a small brush with soft bristles.

Products that remove odors from the vehicle’supholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer.

Do not clean the vehicle using:

• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’sinterior surfaces.

• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with acleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damagethe interior and does not improve the effectivenessof soil removal.

• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers can leave residue that streaks andattracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 dropsper gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.

• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.

• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. thatcan damage the vehicle’s interior.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachmentfrequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canistervacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may onlybe used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. Forany soil, always try to remove it first with plain water orclub soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as muchof the soil as possible using one of the followingtechniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

5-91

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water orclub soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rubtoward the center. Continue cleaning, using a cleanarea of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mildsoap solution and repeat the cleaning processthat was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner orspot lifter may be necessary. When a commercialupholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test asmall hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locallycleaned area gives any impression that a ring formationmay result, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, a papertowel can be used to blot excess moisture from thefabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water can be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution canbe used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not useheat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Neveruse spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Manycommercial leather cleaners and coatings that are soldto preserve and protect leather may permanentlychange the appearance and feel of the leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containing organic solvents to cleanthe vehicle’s interior because they can alter theappearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniformmanner. Never use shoe polish on leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never usespot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Manycommercial cleaners and coatings that are sold topreserve and protect soft plastic surfaces maypermanently change the appearance and feel of theinterior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone

5-92

or wax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because they canalter the appearance by increasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss on theinstrument panel. The increase in gloss may causeannoying reflections in the windshield and even make itdifficult to see through the windshield under certainconditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severelyweaken them. In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,damp weather frequent application may be required. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keepit clean by washing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that candamage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.Check the cleaning product label. If it states thatit should not be used on plastic parts, do not use iton the vehicle or damage may occur and it wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a carwashing soap. Do not use cleaning agents thatare petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic onthe vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’directions regarding correct product usage, necessarysafety precautions and appropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

5-93

Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after toremove all cleaning agents completely. If they areallowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cottontowel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enterthe vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal ofpaint and decals.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle onpage 5-93.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaning products can beobtained from your dealer/retailer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, theclearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish maydamage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish on the vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on paintedsurfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. Ifnecessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod of years. To help keep the paint finish lookingnew, keep the vehicle garaged or covered wheneverpossible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keeptheir luster. Washing with water is all that is usuallyneeded. However, chrome polish may be used onchrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.

5-94

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damagingprotective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for allbright metal parts.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth orpaper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughlywhen cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and abuildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may causewiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

Convertible TopThe vehicle’s convertible top should be cleaned often.However, high pressure car washes may cause water toenter your vehicle.

When you hand wash the top, do it in partial shade.Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and a soft sponge.A chamois or cloth may leave lint on the top, anda brush can chafe the threads in the top fabric. Do notuse detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents or bleachingagents.

Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly to avoidspots or rings. Let the soap remain on the fabric fora few minutes. When the top is really dirty, use a mildfoam-type cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entirevehicle, then let the top dry in direct sunlight.

To protect the convertible top:

• After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top iscompletely dry before you lower it.

• Do not get any cleaner on the vehicle’s paintedfinish; it could leave streaks.

• If you decide to go through an automatic car wash,ask the manager if the equipment could damageyour top.

5-95

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheelsand TrimThe vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-platedwheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mildsoap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsingthoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim maybe damaged if the vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have been sprayed withmagnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads for conditions such asice and dust. Always wash the vehicle’s chromewith soap and water after exposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasivepolishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairswould not be covered by the warranty. Useonly approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,

cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because they could damage the surface. Do notuse chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheelscould damage the wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by the warranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, butavoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff offimmediately after application.

Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automaticcar wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes, could damage the aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not becovered by the warranty. Never drive a vehicleequipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheelsthrough an automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on the vehicle may damage the paint finishand/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, alwayswipe off any overspray from all painted surfaceson the vehicle.

5-96

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide thecorrosion protection while maintaining the vehiclewarranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in thefinish should be repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode quickly and may develop into major repairexpense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials available from your dealer/retailer. Largerareas of finish damage can be corrected in yourdealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing systemcan do this.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,and small, irregular dark spots etched into thepaint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

5-97

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, onthe driver side. It can be seen through the windshieldfrom outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels andthe certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. Thiscode helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-104 foryour vehicle’s engine code.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the inside of the glove box. It isvery helpful if you ever need to order parts. The labelhas the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Do not add anything electrical to thevehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damagethe vehicle and the damage would not be coveredby the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electricalequipment can keep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even ifthe vehicle is not operating.

5-98

The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting toadd anything electrical to the vehicle, see ServicingYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-46.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuseblock. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turnoff. If this happens, have the headlamp wiring checkedright away.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse block protect the powerwindows and other power accessories. When the currentload is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens andcloses, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed orgoes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of J-Case fuses,mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure youreplace a bad fuse with a new one of the identicalsize and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and do not havea spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the sameamperage. Just pick some feature of the vehicle that youcan get along without – like the radio or cigarettelighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.

Floor Console Fuse BlockThe floor console fuse block is located on the passengerside of the vehicle under the carpet.

Remove the fuse block cover to access the fuses. Usethe fuse puller to remove fuses.

After re-installing the fuse block cover, be sure to tuckthe carpet under the heater floor outlets.

5-99

Fuses Usage1 Fuse Puller2 Empty3 Empty4 Empty5 Empty6 Amplifier7 Cluster

Fuses Usage8 Ignition Switch, PassKey III+9 Stoplamp

10 Climate Control System,PassKey III+

11 Empty12 Spare13 Airbag14 Spare15 Wiper

16Climate Control System, AutomaticOccupant Sensing Module, CrankRelay, Instrument Panel Cluster

17 Empty18 Empty19 Steering Wheel Controls20 Spare21 Spare22 Empty23 Radio24 Sensing and Diagnostic Module

25 Engine Control Module,Transmission Control Module

26 Door Locks27 Interior Lamps

5-100

Fuses Usage28 Steering Wheel Control Backlighting29 Power Windows30 Climate Control System31 Empty32 Retained Accessory Power

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is located in the enginecompartment on the passenger side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover for access to the fuse block.

Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical componentson the vehicle may damage it. Always keep thecovers on any electrical component.

To remove fuses, use the fuse puller, or hold the end ofthe fuse between your thumb and index finger andpull straight out.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 formore information on location.

Fuses Usage1 Empty (LE5); Cooling Fan (LNF)2 Rear Window Defogger3 Empty4 Body Control Module 35 Crank6 Body Control Module 27 Body Control Module8 Cooling Fan 2 (LE5); Empty (LNF)9 Empty

10 Trunk

5-101

Fuses Usage11 Trunk12 Empty13 Fuel Pump14 Rear Defogger Relay15 Air Conditioning Clutch Relay16 Empty17 Empty18 Trunk Release Relay19 Fuel Pump Relay20 Empty21 Mirrors22 Air Conditioning23 Empty

24 Cooling Fan 2 Relay (LE5);Empty (LNF)

25 Fuse Puller26 Powertrain Relay27 Empty

28Back-up Lamps Relay(Automatic Transmission); Empty(Manual Transmission)

29 Data Link Connector30 Outlet

Fuses Usage

31Back-up Lamps(Automatic Transmission); Empty(Manual Transmission)

32 Empty (LE5), Vacuum Pump (LNF)33 Emissions34 Crank Relay35 Empty36 Empty37 Power Seat

38 Empty (LE5), Vacuum PumpRelay (LNF)

39 Empty40 Cooling Fan 1 (LE5); Empty (LNF)

41 Empty (LE5); Turbo, CamPhaser (LNF)

42 Engine Control Module

43 Engine Control Module,Transmission

44 Antilock Brake System

45 Injectors, Ignition Coils (LE5);Ignition Coils (LNF)

46Back-up Lamps (ManualTransmission); Empty(Automatic Transmission)

47 Empty

5-102

Fuses Usage48 Daytime Running Lamps Relay49 Daytime Running Lamps

50 Cooling Fan 1 Relay (LE5);Empty (LNF)

51 Run/Crank Relay52 Windshield Wiper Low/High Relay53 Fog Lamps54 Fog Lamps Relay55 Horn Relay

56 S Band, OnStar®, Remote KeylessEntry System

57 Antilock Brake System58 Wiper Diode59 Windshield Wiper60 Horn

Fuses Usage61 Antilock Brake System62 Instrument Panel Ignition63 Driver Side High Beam64 Canister Vent65 Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp

66 Passenger Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

67 Passenger Side High-BeamHeadlamp

68 Parking Lamps Relay69 Parking Lamps70 Windshield Wiper On/Off Relay71 Low-Beam Headlamp Relay72 High-Beam Headlamp Relay

5-103

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.Cooling System

2.0L L4 Engine — Automatic 9.2 qt 8.7 L2.0L L4 Engine — Manual 9.5 qt 9.0 L2.4L L4 Engine — Automatic 8.7 qt 8.2 L2.4L L4 Engine — Manual 8.9 qt 8.4 L

Engine Oil with Filter2.0L L4 and 2.4L L4 5.0 qt 4.7 L

Fuel Tank 13.6 gal 51.5 LTransmission, Automatic (Bottom Pan Removal) 7.4 qt 7.0 LTransmission, Manual (Complete Drain and Refill) 2.75 qt 2.6 LWheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual.

5-104

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.0L L4 X AutomaticManual 0.035 in (0.90 mm)

2.4L L4 B AutomaticManual 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

5-105

✍ NOTES

5-106

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-3Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4Additional Required Services ............................6-6Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-14Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-15Maintenance Record .....................................6-16

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warrantyand Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer fordetails.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,replacement parts, and recommended fluids andlubricants as prescribed in this manual arenecessary to keep this vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepthe vehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommended maintenance isimportant. Improper vehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluidlevels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level ofemissions from the vehicle. To help protect theenvironment, and to keep the vehicle in good condition,be sure to maintain the vehicle properly.

6-2

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe want to help keep this vehicle in good workingcondition. But we do not know exactly how you will driveit. You might drive very short distances only a fewtimes a week. Or you might drive long distances all thetime in very hot, dusty weather. You might use thevehicle in making deliveries. Or you might driveit to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,see your dealer/retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits on the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-5.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4should be performed when indicated. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 6-6 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can bedangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can beseriously injured. Do your own maintenance workonly if you have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job. If you haveany doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have aqualified technician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 5-4.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, have your dealer/retailer dothese jobs.

When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trainedand supported service technicians will perform thework using genuine parts.

To purchase service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-14.

Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells whatshould be checked, when to check it, and whatcan easily be done to help keep the vehicle in goodcondition.

6-3

The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants touse are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12 and Maintenance Replacement Partson page 6-14. When the vehicle is serviced, make surethese are used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuineparts from your dealer/retailer.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL SOON message displays onthe Driver Information Center (DIC), service is requiredfor the vehicle. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-37. Have the vehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It ispossible that, if driving under the best conditions, theengine oil life system may not indicate that vehicleservice is necessary for over a year. However,the engine oil and filter must be changed at leastonce a year and at this time the system must be reset.Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicianswho will perform this work using genuine parts and resetthe system.

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since the last service. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 5-19 for information on the EngineOil Life System and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections are required.Required services are described in the following for“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,it is recommended that the first service beMaintenance I, the second service be Maintenance II,and then alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II maybe required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGEOIL SOON message displays within 10 months since thevehicle was purchased or Maintenance II wasperformed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previousservice performed was Maintenance I. Always useMaintenance II whenever the CHANGE OIL SOONmessage displays 10 months or more since thelast service or if the message has not come on at all forone year.

6-4

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19. An Emission ControlService.

• •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-21. See footnote (h). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 5-60 and At Least Once a Month on page 6-9. • •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels. Add fluid as needed. • •Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

6-5

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damageor leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21. • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(severe service). See footnote (k). • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(normal service). •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

Engine cooling system service(or every five years, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (g).

•

6-6

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotors for surfacecondition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear orcracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums,wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hosesfor proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced ifthey are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine partsas needed. To help ensure proper operation, apressure test of the cooling system and pressure capand cleaning the outside of the radiator and airconditioning condenser is recommended at leastonce a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, orcontamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, ifcontaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn ordamaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement onpage 5-46 and Windshield and Wiper Blades onpage 5-95 for more information.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safetybelt assemblies are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If yousee anything that might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn orfrayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checkingthe Restraint Systems on page 1-48.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hingesand latches, including those for the body doors,hood, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, releasepawl, rear compartment, glove box door, and consoledoor. More frequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth willmake them last longer, seal better, and not stick orsqueak.

(g) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, orobvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.

(h) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspectthe filter at each engine oil change.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This servicecan be complex; you should have your dealer/retailerperform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-25for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure testthe cooling system and pressure cap.

6-7

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired andthe fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

(k) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more of theseconditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should be performedat the intervals specified to help ensure vehiclesafety, dependability, and emission control performance.Your dealer/retailer can assist with these checks andservices.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to thevehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checks ateach fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Notice: It is important to check the engine oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure tokeep the engine oil at the proper level can causedamage to the engine not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolanton page 5-25.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid ifnecessary.

6-8

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inspection and Inflation CheckInspect the vehicle’s tires for wear and make sure theyare inflated to the correct pressures. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-53.

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, the vehiclecould move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you orothers could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regularbrake. See Parking Brake on page 2-23.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready toturn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start theengine in each gear. The vehicle should start onlyin P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts inany other position, contact your dealer/retailerfor service.For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift leverin Neutral, push the clutch pedal down halfway,and try to start the engine. The vehicle should startonly when the clutch pedal is pushed down allthe way to the floor. If the vehicle starts when theclutch pedal is not pushed all the way down, contactyour dealer/retailer for service.

6-9

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, the vehiclecould move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you orothers could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parked on alevel surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-23.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move the shift lever outof P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailerfor service.

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turnthe ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.

• For automatic transmission vehicles, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park). The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

• For manual transmission vehicles, the ignition keyshould come out only in LOCK/OFF.

Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right. Itshould only lock when turned to the right. Contact yourdealer/retailer if service is required.

6-10

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission P (Park) MechanismCheck

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehicle couldbegin to move. You or others could be injured andproperty could be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.Be ready to apply the regular brake at onceshould the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With

the engine running and transmission in N (Neutral),slowly remove foot pressure from the regularbrake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by theparking brake only.

• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park).Then release the parking brake followed bythe regular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.

Tire Sealant and Compressor KitCheck the sealant expiration date printed on theinstruction label of the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kitat least once a year. See your dealer/retailer for areplacement canister.

6-11

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, partnumber, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil(2.4L L4engine)

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil onpage 5-15.

Engine Oil(2.0L L4engine)

The engine requires a specialengine oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M. Oils meeting thisstandard can be identified with theAmerican Petroleum Institute (API)Certified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. However, not allsynthetic API oils with the starburstsymbol will meet this GM standard.Look for and use only an oil thatmeets GM Standard GM4718M. Forthe proper viscosity, see Engine Oilon page 5-15.


Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-25.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

HydraulicClutch System

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, inCanada 89021186).

WindshieldWasher Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

ManualTransmission

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806, inCanada 89021807).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

6-12


Rear Axle

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant (GM PartNo. U.S. 89021677, inCanada 89021678) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Rear Axle(Limited-SlipDifferential)

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic AxleLubricant (GM Part No.U.S. 89021677, inCanada 89021678) meeting GMSpecification 9986115. With acomplete drain and refill add4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited-SlipAxle Lubricant Additive(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, inCanada 992694) where required.See Rear Axle on page 5-40.

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.


Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No.U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, inCanada 992887).

6-13

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Maintenance Replacement PartsPart Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

2.0L L4 Engine 15925738 A3084C

2.4L L4 Engine 15287103 A3076C

Engine Oil Filter 12605566 PF457G

Spark Plugs

2.0L L4 Engine 12620540 41-108

2.4L L4 Engine 12598004 41-103

Wiper Blades

Driver Side — 16 in (40 cm) 10344209 —

Passenger Side — 22 in (55 cm) 10344210 —

6-14

Engine Drive Belt Routing

Belt routing for air conditioning (AC) shown. Dotted linerepresents routing for vehicles without AC.

6-15

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additionalinformation from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You shouldretain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

6-16

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-17

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-18

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-4Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users ...............................................7-5Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-5GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-6Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6Scheduling Service Appointments .....................7-8Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-9Collision Damage Repair ................................7-10

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-13Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ....................................7-13Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ..............................................7-13Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-14Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-14

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-15Event Data Recorders ...................................7-15OnStar® ......................................................7-16Navigation System ........................................7-16Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-16

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

7-1

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or the operation of the vehiclewill be resolved by the dealer’s sales or servicedepartments. Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned, misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with the sales, service, or partsmanager, contact the owner of the dealership or thegeneral manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, in theU.S., call the Pontiac Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-762-2737. In Canada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Communication Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in orderto give your inquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration or title, or theplate at the top left of the instrument panel andvisible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Pontiac, remember that your concernwill likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That iswhy we suggest you follow Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motorsand your dealer are committed to making sure youare completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfied after followingthe procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you canfile with the BBB Auto Line Program to enforce yourrights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehiclerepairs or the interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you may be required toresort to this informal dispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of the program is free of

7-2

charge and your case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given inyour case, you may reject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

You can contact the BBB Auto Line Program using thetoll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all 50 states and the Districtof Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves theright to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event thatyou do not feel your concerns have been addressedafter following the procedure outlined in Steps One andTwo, General Motors of Canada Limited wants youto be aware of its participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors ofCanada Limited has committed to binding arbitration ofowner disputes involving factory-related vehicleservice claims. The program provides for the review of

the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearing before the arbiter.The program is designed so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believe our impartialprogram offers advantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free ofcharge.

For further information concerning eligibility in theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), calltoll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN).

7-3

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmownercenter.com/pontiacInformation and services customized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenient place.

• Digital owner manual, warranty information,and more

• Online service and maintenance records

• Find Pontiac dealers for service nationwide

• Exclusive privileges and offers

• Recall notices for your specific vehicle

• OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earningssummaries

Other Helpful Links:Pontiac − www.pontiac.com

Pontiac Merchandise — www.pontiacmall.com

Help Center — www.pontiac.com/helpcenter

• FAQ

• Contact Us

My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.caMy GM Canada is a password-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can save information onGM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and services youwill have access to:

• My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as addressand phone number for each of your preferred GMdealers/retailers.

• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts andservice estimates, check trade-in values, orschedule a service appointment by adding thevehicles you own to your driveway profile.

• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use toolsand forms with greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section withinwww.gm.ca.

7-4

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Pontiac has TTY equipment available at itsCustomer Assistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate with Pontiac bydialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668). (TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesPontiac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Pontiac, the letter should beaddressed to:

United States — Customer AssistancePontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.Pontiac.com1-800-762-2737 or1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

7-5

Mexico, Central America and CaribbeanIslands/Countries (Except Puerto Ricoand U.S. Virgin Islands) — CustomerAssistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma #2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period of timefrom the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For moredetails, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visitgmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTYusers call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance ProgramFor U.S. purchased vehicles,call 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743); (Text telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

Calling for AssistanceWhen calling Roadside Assistance, have the followinginformation ready:

• Your name, home address, and home telephonenumber

• Telephone number of your location

• Location of the vehicle

7-6

• Model, year, color, and license plate number of thevehicle

• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

CoverageServices are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles(160 000 km), whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. InCanada, a person driving the vehicle without permissionfrom the owner is not covered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Pontiac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make any changesor discontinue the Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limited reservethe right to limit services or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims are made too often, orthe same type of claim is made many times.

Services Provided• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel

for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.

• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock thevehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar®. For securityreasons, the driver must present identificationbefore this service is given.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Road orHighway: Tow to the nearest Pontiac dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash andcannot be driven. Assistance is also given whenthe vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change aflat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, ifequipped, must be in good condition and properlyinflated. It is the owner’s responsibility for the repairor replacement of the tire if it is not covered bythe warranty.

• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jumpstart a dead battery.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If yourtrip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidentalexpenses may be reimbursed during the5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrainwarranty period. Items considered are hotel, meals,and rental car.

7-7

Services Not Included in RoadsideAssistance• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.

• Legal fines.

• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

• Towing or services for vehicles driven on anon-public road or highway.

Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately

$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and other fuels are notprovided through this service.

• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.

• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of NorthAmerica are provided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or the most scenic route.There is a limit of six requests per year. Additionaltravel information is also available. Allowthree weeks for delivery.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Mustbe over 250 kilometres from where your trip wasstarted to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limitedrequires pre-authorization, original detailedreceipts, and a copy of the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received, the RoadsideAssistance advisor will help you make arrangementsand explain how to receive payment.

• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot beprovided right away, the Roadside Assistanceadvisor may give you permission to get localemergency road service. You will receive payment,up to $100, after sending the original receipt toRoadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost for parts and laborfor repairs not covered by the warranty arethe owner responsibility.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, contactyour dealer/retailer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment and advising yourservice consultant of your transportation needs, yourdealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.

7-8

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,let them know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle forservice, you are urged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for the same day repair.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we and ourparticipating dealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer support program for vehicleswith the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverageperiod in Canada) and extended powertrain, andhybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and Canada.

Several courtesy transportation options are available toassist in reducing your inconvenience when warrantyrepairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information” furnished witheach new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you withshuttle service to get you to your destination withminimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, andpublic transportation is used instead of the dealer’sshuttle service, the expense must be supportedby original receipts and can only be up to the maximumamount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limited reimbursementfor reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costs and be supported byoriginal receipts. See your dealer for informationregarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement offuel or other transportation costs.

7-9

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnightwarranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by original receipts. Thisrequires that you sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary and mayinclude minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repair.

It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, may not beavailable at every dealer. Please contact your dealerfor specific information about availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will be administeredby appropriate dealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at its sole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment and qualityreplacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairsdiminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safetyperformance can be compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with thesame materials and construction methods as the partswith which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choice to ensure that yourvehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also be used forrepair. These parts are typically removed from vehiclesthat were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,the parts being recycled are from undamaged sectionsof the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GMpart, may be an acceptable choice to maintain yourvehicle’s originally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these parts is notknown. Such parts are not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failuresare not covered by that warranty.

7-10

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These aremade by companies other than GM and may nothave been tested for your vehicle. As a result, theseparts may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform properly insubsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are not coveredby your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyvehicle failure related to such parts are not covered bythat warranty.

Repair FacilityWe recommend that you choose a collision repairfacility that meets your needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have acollision repair center with GM-trained technicians andstate of the art equipment, or be able to recommenda collision repair center that has GM-trained techniciansand comparable equipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in the quality of coverageafforded by various insurance policy terms. Manyinsurance policies provide reduced protection to yourGM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairsby using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that

you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts. If such insurancecoverage is not available from your current insurancecarrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assures repairs withGenuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Readyour lease carefully, as you may be charged at theend of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in a crash.

• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you areuninjured, make sure that no one else in yourvehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call emergency servicesfor help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of. Move yourvehicle only if its position puts you in danger or youare instructed to move it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requested informationto police and other parties involved in the crash.Do not discuss your personal condition, mentalframe of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.This will help guard against post-crash legal action.

7-11

• If you need roadside assistance, call GM RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 7-6 for more information.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where thetowing service will be taking it. Get a card fromthe tow truck operator or write down the driver’sname, the service’s name, and the phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it istowed away. Make sure this includes your insuranceinformation and registration if you keep theseitems in your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you will need fromthe other driver. Things like name, address, phonenumber, driver’s license number, vehicle licenseplate, vehicle make, model and model year, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), insurance companyand policy number, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company from thescene of the crash. They will walk you throughthe information they will need. If they ask fora police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and you canget a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for yourvehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or aprivate collision repair facility to fix the damage,make sure you are comfortable with them.Remember, you will have to feel comfortable withtheir work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully andmake sure you understand what work will beperformed on your vehicle. If you have a question,ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcomethis opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,GM recommends that you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that any required replacementcollision parts be original equipment parts, either newGenuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by yourGM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must livewith the repair. Depending on your policy limits, yourinsurance company may initially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repairprofessional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.

7-12

Remember if your vehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GMparts, even if your insurance coverage does not paythe full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying for therepairs, you are not obligated to accept a repairvaluation based on that insurance company’s collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits withthat company. In such cases, you can have control ofthe repair and parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA

cannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer/retailer, or GeneralMotors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov;or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington D.C., 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehiclehas a safety defect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, in addition to notifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 orwrite to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

7-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-762-2737, or write:

Pontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give additional technical serviceinformation needed to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and service ofyour vehicle.

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, andWarranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals are availablefor current and past model GM vehicles. To requestan order form, specify year and model name ofthe vehicle.

7-14

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on theWorld Wide Web at: helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number of sophisticatedcomputers that record information about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven. For example,your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmission performance, to monitorthe conditions for airbag deployment and deployairbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide

antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.These modules may store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how you operate thevehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or averagespeed. These modules may also retain the owner’spersonal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seatpositions, and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash ornear crash-like situations, such as an airbag deploymentor hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicleis designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safetybelts were buckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal

• How fast the vehicle was traveling

7-15

This data can help provide a better understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle onlyif a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normal driving conditionsand no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, could combine the EDRdata with the type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment isrequired, and access to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, otherparties, such as law enforcement, that have the specialequipment, can read the information if they haveaccess to the vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data or share it with othersexcept: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; inresponse to an official request of police or similargovernment office; as part of GM’s defense of litigationthrough the discovery process; or, as required bylaw. Data that GM collects or receives may also be usedfor GM research needs or may be made available toothers for research purposes, where a need is shownand the data is not tied to a specific vehicle orvehicle owner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to theOnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms andConditions for information on data collection anduse. See also OnStar® System on page 2-30 in thismanual for more information.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigation system, use of thesystem may result in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, and other tripinformation. Refer to the navigation system operatingmanual for information on stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functionssuch as tire pressure monitoring and ignition systemsecurity, as well as in connection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking andstarting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage dooropeners. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not useor record personal information or link with any otherGM system containing personal information.

7-16

AAccessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-14Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 1-47Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-98Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-21Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-16Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-24Readiness Light .......................................... 3-23

Airbag System ................................................ 1-36Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ................................................... 1-47How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-40Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-42Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-46What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-40What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-40When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-39Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-38

Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-81Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System ...................................................... 3-81Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-4Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-26

Appearance CareAluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-96Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-93Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-97Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-94Convertible Top ........................................... 5-95Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-91Finish Care ................................................. 5-94Finish Damage ............................................ 5-97Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ................................................. 5-92Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-90Leather ...................................................... 5-92Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-97Tires .......................................................... 5-96Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-97Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-93Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-93Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-95

Appointments, Scheduling Service ....................... 7-8Ashtray ......................................................... 3-15Audio System ................................................. 3-46

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-79Chime Level Adjustment ............................... 3-81Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-81Radio Reception .......................................... 3-80Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-47Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-78XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-81

1

Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-49Automatic Door Lock ......................................... 2-7Automatic Door Unlock ...................................... 2-7Automatic Transmission

Fluid .......................................................... 5-22Operation ................................................... 2-19

BBattery .......................................................... 5-35

Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-14Bluetooth® ..................................................... 3-68Brake

Emergencies ................................................ 4-5Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-32Brakes .......................................................... 5-32

System Warning Light .................................. 3-25Braking ........................................................... 4-4Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-16Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-42

Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-44Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps ..... 5-43Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-42Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-41Headlamps ................................................. 5-42

Bulb Replacement (cont.)License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-45Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-45Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .... 5-43, 5-44

Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-63

CCalifornia Fuel .................................................. 5-6California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 5-4California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4Canadian Owners ................................................ iiCapacities and Specifications .......................... 5-104Carbon Monoxide ............................. 2-8, 2-27, 4-17Care of

Safety Belts ................................................ 5-93CD, MP3 ....................................................... 3-60Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-33Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-70Charging System Light .................................... 3-25Check

Engine Lamp .............................................. 3-29Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-97

2

Child RestraintsChild Restraint Systems ............................... 1-29Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-25Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-31Older Children ............................................. 1-22Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front

Seat Position ........................................... 1-32Chime Level Adjustment .................................. 3-81Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-15Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-96Convertible Top ........................................... 5-95Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-94Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-91Finish Care ................................................. 5-94Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ................................................. 5-92Interior ....................................................... 5-90Leather ...................................................... 5-92Tires .......................................................... 5-96Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-97Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-93Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-93Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-95

Climate Control System ................................... 3-16Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-19

Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-47Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-23Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-10

Compressor KitStoring ....................................................... 5-89

Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant .................... 5-71, 5-80Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-12Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3Convertible Top .............................................. 2-37Coolant

Engine ....................................................... 5-25Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-28Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-28

Cooling System .............................................. 5-23Cruise Control .................................................. 3-9Cupholders .................................................... 2-33Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-9Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)

Users ....................................................... 7-5Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-5Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-6Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-14Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ............................................ 7-13Reporting Safety Defects to the United States

Government ............................................ 7-13Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-14

3

DDaytime Running Lamp ................................... 3-13Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-7Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 3-60Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4Door

Automatic Door Lock ..................................... 2-7Automatic Door Unlock .................................. 2-7Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-7Manual Door Locks ....................................... 2-6Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-6

DriverSeat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-2

Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-34DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-35DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-41DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-37

DrivingAt Night ..................................................... 4-13Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-15Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunken ....................................................... 4-3Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-15Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-16In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-14Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-20Winter ........................................................ 4-17

Driving for Better Fuel Economy ......................... 4-2

EEDR ............................................................. 7-15Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-98Floor Console Fuse Block ............................. 5-99Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-99Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-99Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-99Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-101

Electronic ImmobilizerPASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-14

Electronic Immobilizer OperationPASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-14

Electronic Stability Control ................................. 4-6Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light ........... 3-27Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-21Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-29Coolant ...................................................... 5-25Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-28Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-15Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12Exhaust ..................................................... 2-27Oil ............................................................. 5-15Oil Life System ........................................... 5-19Overheating ................................................ 5-29Starting ...................................................... 2-17

4

Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-14Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-15Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-21

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-21Finish Damage ............................................... 5-97Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-81Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-5Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-7Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-70Fluid

Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-22Power Steering ........................................... 5-30Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-31

Fog LampFog ........................................................... 3-13

Fuel ............................................................... 5-5Additives ...................................................... 5-6California Fuel .............................................. 5-6Driving for Better Economy ............................. 4-2Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7

Fuel (cont.)Gage ......................................................... 3-33Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-34

FusesFloor Console Fuse Block ............................. 5-99Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-99Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-101

GGage

Fuel .......................................................... 3-33Speedometer .............................................. 3-21Tachometer ................................................. 3-21

GasolineOctane ........................................................ 5-5Specifications ............................................... 5-5

Glove Box ..................................................... 2-33GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-6

HHazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-5Headlamp

Aiming ....................................................... 5-41Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-99

5

Headlamps ............................................ 3-12, 5-42Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-42Daytime Running Lamp ................................ 3-13Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-7Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps ..... 5-43Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-42High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-7On Reminder .............................................. 3-13

Heater ........................................................... 3-16Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-2Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-33Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-15Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-16Hood

Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10Release ..................................................... 5-11

Horn ............................................................... 3-5How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-11Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-23

IIgnition Positions ............................................. 2-16Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-25Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-53Inflator Kit, Tire ....................................... 5-71, 5-80Installing the Roof Panel .................................. 2-36

Instrument PanelBrightness .................................................. 3-14Cluster ....................................................... 3-20Overview ..................................................... 3-4

JJump Starting ................................................. 5-36

KKeyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3Keys ............................................................... 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-49Lamp

Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-29Lamps

Mirror Reading ............................................ 3-14Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-18LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... 1-31Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-5License Plate Lamps ....................................... 5-45

6

LightAirbag Readiness ........................................ 3-23Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............ 3-26Brake System Warning ................................. 3-25Charging System ......................................... 3-25Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-28Highbeam On ............................................. 3-33Low Coolant Warning ................................... 3-28Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-34Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-32Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-24Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-22Security ..................................................... 3-32Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-29Trunk Ajar .................................................. 3-33

LightingEntry/Exit ................................................... 3-14

Lights ............................................................ 3-12Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-7High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-7On Reminder .............................................. 3-13

Limited-Slip Rear Axle ..................................... 4-10Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-20Locks

Automatic Door Lock ..................................... 2-7Automatic Door Unlock .................................. 2-7Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-7Manual Door ................................................ 2-6Power Door .................................................. 2-6

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12Low Coolant Warning Light .............................. 3-28Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-34Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 1-31

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9Introduction .................................................. 6-2Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-14Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4Using .......................................................... 6-3Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 3-29Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2Manual Transmission

Fluid .......................................................... 5-23Operation ................................................... 2-22

Manual Windows ............................................ 2-11

7

MessageDIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-37

Mirror Reading Lamps ..................................... 3-14Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-29Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-29Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-29

MP3 ............................................................. 3-60MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4

NNavigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-16New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-16

OOdometer ...................................................... 3-21Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-11Oil

Engine ....................................................... 5-15Pressure Light ............................................. 3-32

Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-19Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-22Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-16OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-30

Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-19Outlets

Accessory Power ......................................... 3-14Outside

Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-29Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-29

Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

PPaint, Damage ............................................... 5-97Park

Shifting Into ................................................ 2-24Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-25

Park Brake .................................................... 2-23Parking

Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-26Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-26Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-24Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-42Passing ......................................................... 4-12PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 2-14PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer

Operation ................................................... 2-14Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4Phone

Bluetooth® .................................................. 3-68

8

PowerDoor Locks .................................................. 2-6Electrical System ......................................... 5-99Retained Accessory ..................................... 2-17Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-30Windows .................................................... 2-11

Privacy .......................................................... 7-15Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-15Navigation System ....................................... 7-16OnStar ....................................................... 7-16Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-16

RRadio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy .... 7-16Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-49Radios

Reception ................................................... 3-80Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-47Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-78

Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-40Limited-Slip ................................................. 4-10

Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-29Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-3Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-25Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ..................................................... 2-4

Removing the Roof Panel ................................ 2-34Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-45Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-14Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government .................................. 7-13General Motors ........................................... 7-14United States Government ............................ 7-13

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-48Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash .................................................. 1-49Retained Accessory Power ............................... 2-17Roadside

Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-20Roof Panel .................................................... 2-33

Installing the Roof Panel ............................... 2-36Removing the Roof Panel ............................. 2-34

Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-15Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 2-28

SSafety Belt Reminders ..................................... 3-22Safety Belts

Care of ...................................................... 5-93How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-11Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-18

9

Safety Belts (cont.)Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-21Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-21Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-6

Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iiiScheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4Seatback Latches ............................................. 1-5Seats

Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-2Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-3Seatback Latches .......................................... 1-5

Securing a Child RestraintRight Front Seat Position .............................. 1-32

Security Light ................................................. 3-32Service ........................................................... 5-3

Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3Adding Equipment to the Outside of the

Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5California Perchlorate Materials

Requirements ............................................ 5-4California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-4Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 3-29Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-14

Service, Scheduling Appointments ....................... 7-8Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-46Setting the Clock ............................................ 3-47Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-97Shifting Into Park ............................................ 2-24

Shifting Out of Park ........................................ 2-25Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-104Speedometer .................................................. 3-21Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-17Steering ........................................................ 4-10Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-79Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-33Cupholders ................................................. 2-33Glove Box .................................................. 2-33

Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 5-89Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-19Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-12

TTachometer .................................................... 3-21Taillamps

Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .................. 5-43, 5-44Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-78Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-12

Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-12PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ 2-14PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer

Operation ................................................ 2-14Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6Time, Setting .................................................. 3-47

10

TirePressure Light ............................................. 3-29

Tire SealantStoring ....................................................... 5-89

Tires ............................................................. 5-47Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,

Cleaning ................................................. 5-96Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-63Chains ....................................................... 5-70Cleaning .................................................... 5-96Different Size .............................................. 5-65If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-70Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-53Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-60Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-56Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-54Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ........... 5-71, 5-80Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-49Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-50Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-65Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-67Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-67When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-62Winter Tires ................................................ 5-48

TowingRecreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-25Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-25Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-25

TractionControl System (TCS) .................................... 4-8Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................. 4-10

Traction Control System ................................... 3-27Transmission

Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-22Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-23

Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-19Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 2-22Trunk .............................................................. 2-8Trunk Ajar Light .............................................. 3-33Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-6

UUniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-65

VVehicle

Control ........................................................ 4-3Loading ...................................................... 4-20Parking Your ............................................... 2-26Running While Parked .................................. 2-28Symbols ......................................................... iv

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-15

11

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ............................................. 5-98Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-98

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC ........................................................... 3-41

Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-19Visors ........................................................... 2-12

WWarning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-19Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-37Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-5Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-67Different Size .............................................. 5-65Replacement ............................................... 5-67

Windows ....................................................... 2-10Manual ...................................................... 2-11Power ........................................................ 2-11

WindshieldWasher ........................................................ 3-9Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-31Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-46Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-95Wipers ......................................................... 3-8

Winter Driving ................................................ 4-17Winter Tires ................................................... 5-48

XXM Radio Messages ....................................... 3-67XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-81

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

12

Documents

2009 Pontiac Solstice Owner Manual M · Front Seats Manual Seats {CAUTION:You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving